JP2018143382A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To enhance expectation for a specific mode while suppressing a feeling of strangeness in a presentation using a virtual space in which an object is disposed.SOLUTION: A game machine according to the present invention includes specific display means which displays a specific display in a second specific mode, and can change the display mode of the specific display, when a presentation with a content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is performed, from the second specific mode to a first specific mode. On the basis of a notice presentation being performed, the game machine sets a visual field moved by movement means to a specific visual field in a virtual space and after that, accompanying the movement with respect to a specific object disposed in the virtual space, makes a shift to a display using specific image data.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 49

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of executing variable display.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area (also referred to as a “start prize”), the game machine is predetermined. Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Further, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “fluctuation”) when a game medium wins in a specific winning area (also referred to as “starting area”). Some are configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of information becomes the specific display result.

  The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who is given a predetermined game value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means is advantageous for a player who is likely to win a game medium (a big hit gaming state), or a state in which a right to become an advantageous state for the player has occurred. In this state, a predetermined game value such as a state where conditions for paying out premium game media are easily established is given.

  In such a gaming machine, the fact that the display result of the variable display device that displays the symbol as identification information is a combination of specific display modes (specific display result) determined in advance is generally referred to as “big hit”. When a big win occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the game medium shifts to an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state) where the game medium is easy to win. And in each open period, if there is a prize for a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the big prize opening, the big prize opening is closed. An opening time (for example, 30 seconds) is determined for each opening, and even if the number of winnings does not reach a predetermined number, the winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses.

  Further, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to a variable display (for example, a hold display corresponding to a variable display that has not yet been started, an active display corresponding to a variable display being executed), a specification different from the normal mode There was one which displayed a specific display in an aspect. For example, active display is performed in a specific mode to which a sub-icon of “SP” indicating that it will be developed into super reach is added, and the sub icon disappears at the start timing of super reach, thereby changing to a normal mode. There was a thing (for example, refer to patent documents 1).

JP 2013-240380 A (paragraphs 0094,0108, FIGS. 11 to 13) JP 2010-26905 A JP 2007-159664 A

  However, in the above-described gaming machine, the sense of expectation for the specific display after changing to the normal mode cannot be increased.

  Accordingly, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can enhance a sense of expectation for a specific display.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Display means capable of displaying images;
The specific display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in any display mode including at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode that suggests the contents of the production. Possible specific display means,
Production execution means capable of performing production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode;
Image generation means capable of generating in real time an image of a virtual space in which an object is arranged;
Moving means capable of moving the field of view in the virtual space;
A notice effect means capable of executing a notice effect using specific image data,
Based on execution of the notice effect, after setting the field of view moved by the moving means to the specific field of view of the virtual space, the specific image is moved along with the movement of the specific object arranged in the virtual space. Switch to display using data,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then changes the display mode of the specific display when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. It is possible to change from the two specific modes to the first specific mode.

The “game machine” in the configuration of the means 1 refers to, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 91 shown in FIG.
In addition, the “display unit” in the configuration of the unit 1 refers to, for example, the effect display device 9 illustrated in FIG. 1 and the image display device 95 illustrated in FIG.
Note that the “specific display” in the configuration of the means 1 refers to, for example, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG.
The “normal mode” in the configuration of the means 1 refers to, for example, a hold display or an active display displayed in white as shown in FIG.
Further, the “first specific mode” in the configuration of the means 1 refers to, for example, a hold display or an active display displayed in red as shown in FIG.
The “second specific mode” in the configuration of the means 1 refers to, for example, an effect suggestion display mode (a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo-link suggestion mode, an SP suggestion mode) and the like.
Further, “specific display means” in the configuration of means 1 means, for example, steps S662, S662a shown in FIG. 32 and steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726 shown in FIG. 38 in the production control microcomputer 100. , Etc., and the part for executing steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 shown in FIG.
Further, the “production execution means” in the configuration of the means 1 is, for example, steps S8006 and 47 shown in FIG. 43 according to the process table selected in step S8004 of FIG. 43 in the production control microcomputer 100. By executing step S8105 described in the above, it refers to a portion where a special zone effect, a pseudo-ream, and a super reach effect can be executed.
In addition, the “image generation unit” in the configuration of the unit 1 refers to, for example, the effect control CPU 9120 that executes the virtual space display process in step S9161 illustrated in FIG.
The “moving unit” in the configuration of the unit 1 refers to, for example, the effect control CPU 9120 that sets the viewpoint and the visual axis in step S9345 illustrated in FIG.
The “notice effect” in the configuration of the means 1 means, for example, a prior effect, a notification effect, a result notification effect, and the like.
Further, the “notice effecting means” in the configuration of means 1 is for effect control for executing pre-effect control processing in step S9207 shown in FIG. 61 and performing control in steps S9423 and S9425 shown in FIG. This refers to the CPU 9120 and the like.
Further, “setting to a specific field of view in the virtual space” in the configuration of the means 1 means, for example, setting the viewpoint PT0 and the visual axis DV0 in step S9323 of FIG.
Further, “movement with respect to the specific object arranged in the virtual space” in the configuration of the means 1 means, for example, zoom-in by steps S9326 and S9328 shown in FIG.
“Switching to display using specific image data” in the configuration of the means 1 means, for example, display control in step S9333 shown in FIG.
In addition, in the configuration of the means 1, “when a specific display in the second specific mode is displayed and then an effect of the content suggested by the specific display in the second specific mode is executed” means, for example, the suggested content It means 5 seconds after the performance of
Further, “the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode” in the configuration of the means 1 means, for example, that the production control microcomputer 100 has step S4702 described in FIG. , S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold that was displayed in the effect suggestion display mode that is the second display mode This means that the display or active display can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode.

  The “display means” described in the means 1 may also be referred to as “effect device”, “first effect device”, or “second effect device” in this specification.

  According to the configuration of the means 1, the interest of the game can be improved.

(Means 2) In the means 1, the effect execution means may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (for example, The microcomputer 100 for effect control can display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode even when the special zone effect is not executed by performing step S3715 after Y in step S3714. That is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode, the special zone effect which is the suggestion content may not be executed.), The specific display means is the specific display of the second specific mode. Even if the production of the content suggested by is not executed, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the second specific mode is the first specific (For example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4706 to S4708 to execute the special zone in spite of having displayed the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode. Even when the production is not executed, it can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

(Means 3) In the means 1 or 2, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having higher expectation than the second specific mode (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 is The pending change pattern for displaying “red” which is the first specific mode is selected at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while the second special suggestion mode which is the second specific mode is displayed. By determining at the ratio shown in 41 (B) (step S3715), it is possible to display the hold or active in “red”, which is more reliable than the second special suggestion mode to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit. Display may be possible). According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for the first specific aspect can be enhanced.

(Means 4) In any one of the means 1 to 3, the specific display means displays the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode. Possible (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the pending change pattern for displaying “red”, which is the first specific mode, at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while the second By determining whether or not to execute the special zone effect, which is the suggested content of the specific mode, at a ratio shown in FIG. It is also possible to display the hold display or the active display in “red” with high reliability. According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for the first specific aspect can be enhanced.

(Means 5) In any one of the means 1 to 4, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, an effect control microcomputer 100, when P04 is selected as the hold change pattern and “active” is selected as the change timing, after executing steps S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714, executing the steps S4701 and S4702, hold display or active The display mode of the display may be changed from the effect suggestion display mode to “red” and further to “gold”. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the expectation for the display mode of the specific display after changing to the first specific mode.

(Means 6) In any one of the means 1 to 5, the specific display means includes a plurality of types of second specific modes (for example, a first special suggesting mode, a second special suggesting mode, a pseudo continuous suggesting mode, SP indication mode) can display the specific display, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode (for example, production) The control microcomputer 100 uses the tables shown in FIGS. 41 (A) to 41 (D) to determine whether or not to display in each effect suggestion display mode, so that the pending change pattern including “red” ( The ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is displayed is different when it is other than P01. Therefore, the ratio is changed to “red” at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode.) It may be used as a. According to such a configuration, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

(Means 7) In any one of the means 1 to 6, the first effect device (for example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the second effect device (for example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)). The specific display means can display the specific display using the first effect device (for example, the hold display or active display in the combined hold storage display portion 18c provided in the sub display device 9S, the active display area 9A). Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display (for example, a pending change notice effect) (for example, an effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 100) (The portion for executing the hold change notice effect in step S801), and the change effect executing means can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device. First change effect (for example, first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1 with action effect A, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5)), first effect device and second effect device The second change effect (for example, the second hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect with action effect B, the hold change notice effect 4, the hold change notice) The effect 6)) can be executed, and the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes (for example, as shown in FIG. 53) In addition, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, compared to the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, High expectation (reliability) It is also possible. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of changing effects by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects.

(Means 8) In any one of the means 1 to 7, the game machine can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a big hit gaming state), and the specific display means is advantageous A specific display (for example, current display etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled by the state (for example, the big hit expected degree) by the display mode is displayed (for example, the current display is displayed in the current display area 5K), and the advantageous state And a notification means (for example, a confirmed decoration symbol or the like, or an effect control CPU 101 for displaying a confirmed decoration symbol) for notifying whether or not it is controlled, and a variable display execution period (FIG. 55B). After a predetermined notification (for example, notification of temporary deviation by a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 55 (F)) is performed during the period (as shown in FIG. 55 (L), etc.). Specific table (For example, as shown in FIG. 55 (H) to FIG. 55 (K), white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star) and display of this time display A specific notification (for example, notification of a big hit with a confirmed decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 55 (L)) may be performed to the effect that the mode is changed to be controlled in an advantageous state. According to such a structure, an unexpectedness can be given and an interest can be improved.

  Moreover, the form which implements this invention includes the invention which concerns on the following means 9-means 17. Some gaming machines can generate images in real time (for example, Patent Document 2). In addition, there is a display mode of an object (subject) that can be displayed by switching between texture and line drawing display and three-dimensional image display over time (for example, Patent Document 3).

  In the techniques described in Patent Document 2 and Patent Document 3, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable by switching the display.

  The form shown below is made in view of the above-described actual situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably switching the display.

(Means 9) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention provides:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 91 or the like) that can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 95);
Image generation means capable of generating in real time an image of the virtual space in which the object is arranged (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for executing virtual space display processing in step S9161);
A moving means capable of moving the field of view in the virtual space (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for setting a viewpoint and a visual axis in step S9345);
Preliminary effect control means (for example, advance effect control processing is executed in step S9207 and control is performed in steps S9423 and S9425) that can execute a notice effect using specific image data (for example, advance effect, notification effect, result notification effect, etc.). And the production control CPU 9120 for performing
Based on the execution of the notice effect, the field of view moved by the moving means is set as a specific field of view in the virtual space (for example, the viewpoint PT0 and the visual axis DV0 are set in step S9323), and then the virtual The display is switched to the display using the specific image data (for example, the display control in step S9333 or the like) in accordance with the movement with respect to the specific object arranged in the space (for example, zooming in in steps S9326 and S9328).
According to such a configuration, the display can be suitably switched.

(Means 10) In any one of the means 1 to 9, the moving means can move the field of view from a plurality of virtual cameras (for example, virtual cameras CA1 to CA3, etc.) in the virtual space, and execute the notice effect. Corresponding to starting, a specific field of view of the virtual space may be set using a specific virtual camera (for example, virtual camera CA1) included in the plurality of virtual cameras.
In such a configuration, the display can be suitably switched.

(Means 11) In any one of the means 1 to 10, even if an effect display (for example, effect display in step S9325) is added to the specific object in accordance with the movement of the visual field set as the specific visual field in the virtual space. Good (see, for example, FIG. 72E).
In such a configuration, the player can be focused on the specific object.

(Means 12) In any one of the means 1 to 11, the display using the specific image data may include display of an image corresponding to the specific object.
In such a configuration, the display can be switched without giving a sense of incongruity.

(Means 13) In any one of the means 1 to 12, the intermediate image may be displayed when switching to the display using the specific image data.
In such a configuration, the display can be switched without giving a sense of incongruity.

(Means 14) In any one of the means 1 to 13, the notice effect is an effect suggesting the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state, and there are a plurality of kinds of effect forms as the effect forms of the notice effect. (See, for example, FIGS. 66C and 66D).
In such a configuration, the player can be focused on the effect mode of the notice effect.

(Means 15) In any one of the means 1 to 14, after starting the movement of the field of view set to the specific field of the virtual space, an effect that does not switch to the display using the specific image data (for example, according to the notice effect pattern YPA0) A notice effect or the like) may be executable.
In such a configuration, the player can be focused on whether or not the display is switched.

(Means 16) In any one of the means 1 to 15, variable display means for performing variable display (for example, the first special symbol display device 94A, the second special symbol display device 94B, etc.) and the predetermined display are displayed in an operable manner. Predetermined display means (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for executing dance display control processing in step S9206), and a display associated with the predetermined display (for example, a spot on the image of the dancer CHa) corresponding to the information related to variable display. The predetermined display may be displayed with different operations (for example, display by the control of steps S9302 and S9304) depending on whether or not the variable display is being performed.
In such a configuration, the player can be focused on the predetermined display.

(Means 17) In any one of the means 1 to 16, variable display means for performing variable display (for example, the first special symbol display device 94A, the second special symbol display device 94B, etc.) and a predetermined display are displayed in an operable manner. Predetermined display means (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for executing dance display control processing in step S 9206), and performs display related to the predetermined display corresponding to information relating to variable display (for example, an image of dancer CHa) The predetermined display may be displayed in a different manner (for example, display by the control of steps S9302 and S9304) depending on whether or not variable display is in progress.
In such a configuration, the player can be focused on the predetermined display.

It is the front view which looked at the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit configuration of an effect control board, a lamp driver board and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU in a main board | substrate performs. It is a flowchart which shows a 4 ms timer interruption process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern of the production | presentation symbol prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviation. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit fluctuation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation | designated command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of a fluctuation category command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows a starting port switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance specific area | region and a holding buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the effect process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a display result designation | designated command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol change process. It is a flowchart which shows a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation control main process which CPU for presentation control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the command storage area at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a special zone control process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a special zone rush lottery table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows an execution frequency determination lottery table, (C) is explanatory drawing which shows a rush failure production execution lottery table, D) is an explanatory diagram showing an execution timing determination lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a pending | holding display control process. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a pending | holding change pattern determination table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the selection ratio of red pending | holding. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows a 1st special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows a 2nd special suggestion execution lottery table, (C) is explanatory drawing which shows a pseudo | simulation continuous suggestion execution lottery table. (D) is an explanatory view showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol variation start process in an production | presentation control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of an effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows a special zone setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process during effect design change in effect control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation symbol fluctuation | variation stop process in an effect control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a hold display in a 2nd special suggestion aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a hold display in a 2nd special suggestion aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying an active display in a 2nd special suggestion aspect. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the pending | holding change notice effect determination table in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in the modification 1. FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding change notice effect in the modification 1. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of the image display apparatus in the modification 2. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in another example. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control process process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern in another form example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a virtual space display process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a dance display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of prior production control processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of determination of a notice effect. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a dance display. It is a figure which shows the example of execution of a dance display. It is a figure which shows the example of a movement of a viewpoint and a visual axis. It is a figure which shows the execution example of the imaging using a virtual camera. It is a figure which shows the example of a display of virtual space.

  Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 that is an example of a gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as seen from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape, and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be opened and closed. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape that is provided in the game frame so as to be opened and closed. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanism parts and the like are attached, and various parts (games to be described later) attached to them. A structure including the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2 is a hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3. Under the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply tray 3, and a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hitting ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body constituting the game board 6 and various components attached to the plate-like body. In addition, a game area 7 is formed on the front surface of the game board 6 in which a game ball that has been struck can flow down.

  The member that forms the extra ball tray (lower tray) 4 is configured in a stick shape (bar shape), for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray main body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray). Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front and rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operation, for example, by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, an index finger) while the player holds the operation rod of the stick controller 122 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of performing an instruction operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation or the like on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built-in. In addition, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided in the lower plate main body and the like below the stick controller 122. The stick controller 122 includes a vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for causing the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  The member that forms the hitting ball supply tray (upper plate) 3 is subjected to a predetermined instruction operation, for example, by a player pressing a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122). A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the position where the push button 120 is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the mounting positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 as the position approached to either right or left in the upper plate and the lower plate, maintaining the vertical relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 is not in the vertical relationship, but may be in the horizontal relationship, for example.

  An effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 7. The display screen of the effect display device 9 includes an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of the effect symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of effect symbols. The effect symbol display area includes a symbol display area for variably displaying, for example, three decorative (effect) effect symbols of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9. Three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the first special symbol display 8a is executing variable display of the first special symbol, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to execute the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol display 8a executes the second special display. When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the symbol display 8b, the effect display is executed by the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, symbols other than the symbol that will be the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left and right middle symbols) have continued for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol) Stops, swings, scales, or deforms in a state that matches the symbol combination), or multiple symbols fluctuate synchronously in the same symbol, or the position of the display symbol is switched Thus, an effect performed in a state where the possibility of occurrence of a big hit (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) before the final result is displayed is referred to as reach effect. Further, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. And when the display result of the symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not a big hit symbol, it becomes “out” and the variation display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  Note that, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which the effect symbol display is performed as a liquid crystal display effect in the effect display device 9, but the effect performed in the effect display device 9 is the one shown in this embodiment. For example, an effect having a predetermined story characteristic may be executed, and an effect may be executed in which the result of the story is displayed based on the determination result of the jackpot determination or the variation pattern. For example, perform a battle effect where professional wrestling and soccer matches and enemy characters fight, perform an effect to win the game and battle if it is a big hit, and perform an effect to defeat the game and battle if it is off Also good. Further, for example, instead of displaying the result such as winning or losing, an effect may be executed in which a predetermined story such as a story is developed in order.

  In the upper right part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol after the effect symbol, a special symbol described later, and a normal symbol. In this embodiment, a fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol described later, There is provided a fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the variation display of the effect symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol (however, to be precise, the variation display of the effect symbol is varied on the effect control microcomputer 100 side). This is done by measuring the variation time recognized based on the pattern command.) When performing an effect using the effect display device 9, for example, the effect content including the change display of the effect symbol disappears from the screen for a moment. There are a variety of effects such as effects being performed and effects in which movable objects shield all or part of the screen. For this reason, even if the display screen on the effect display device 9 is viewed, it may be difficult to recognize whether or not the current variation display is in progress. Therefore, in this embodiment, whether or not the state of the present variation is being displayed by confirming the state of the fourth symbol by further displaying the variation of the fourth symbol on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. It is possible to reliably recognize whether or not. Note that the 4th symbol is always variably displayed with a constant operation, and is not disappeared from the screen or shielded by a shielding object, so that it can always be visually recognized.

  The 4th symbol for the first special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 9c for the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol The 4th symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as a 4th symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state where the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at a predetermined time interval in a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 8a is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b is synchronized with the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. Synchronous means that the variable display start time and end time are the same, and the variable display period is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the display color reminiscent of the big hit in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol (a display color different from the loss. Sometimes it is displayed in blue, but when it is a big hit, it is displayed in red. When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the display color reminiscent of the jackpot in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol. (The display color is different from the loss. For example, the display color is blue in the case of a loss, whereas it is displayed in red in the case of a big hit. The display color may be changed depending on whether it is R-probable big hit, 8R probable big hit, or sudden probable big hit.) The 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d are turned off. The display color at the time is desirably a display color (for example, black) different from the background image in order to prevent the display color from being assimilated with the background image and disappearing.

  In this embodiment, the case where the 4th symbol display area is provided on a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is shown, but a light emitter such as a lamp or LED is used separately from the effect display device 9. Thus, the fourth symbol display area may be realized. In this case, for example, the variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol may be realized by continuing the state in which the two LEDs are alternately lit, and any of the two LEDs is stopped. Whether or not the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed may be indicated depending on whether or not it is displayed.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which separate fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d are provided corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol are provided. A fourth symbol display area common to the symbols may be provided in a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Moreover, you may make it implement | achieve the 4th symbol display area common with respect to a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol using light-emitting bodies, such as a lamp | ramp and LED. In this case, when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when executing the variation display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, For example, the display of different display colors at certain time intervals may be performed by distinguishing and executing the variation display of the fourth symbol by performing display that repeatedly turns on and off. In addition, when the variation display of the fourth symbol is executed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the fourth symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol, for example, The display of the fourth symbol may be distinguished and executed by performing a display that repeatedly turns on and off at different time intervals. In addition, for example, when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol, and when the stop symbol is derived and displayed corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, the same big hit symbol is obtained. However, you may make it stop-display the stop symbol of a different aspect.

  On the right side of the central portion of the game board 6, a first special symbol display (first variable display portion) 8a that variably displays a first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display 8a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. In other words, the first special symbol display 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. On the right side of the first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 8b for variably displaying the second special symbol as identification information is provided. The second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7 segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. In this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of, for example, 00 to 99, for example.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display unit). There are things to do.

  Although this embodiment shows a case where two special symbol indicators 8a and 8b are provided, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

  For the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the variable display execution condition, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 13 or the second start winning opening) 14 after passing (including winning)), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0 and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed) The state is started and the big hit game is not executed), and when the variable display time (fluctuation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. Note that the passing of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined area such as a prize opening or a gate, and that includes a game ball entering (winning) a prize opening. It is. Deriving and displaying the display result is to finally stop and display a symbol (an example of identification information).

  A winning device having a first start winning port 13 is provided below the effect display device 9. The game ball won in the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the first start opening switch 13a.

  A variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning port 14 through which a game ball can be won is provided below a winning device having a first starting winning port (first starting port) 13. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second start opening) 14 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and detected by the second start opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by a solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game ball can be awarded to the second starting winning port 14 (it is easier to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state, it is easier for the game ball to win the second start winning opening 14 than the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second start winning opening 14. Therefore, in a state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier for the game ball to win the first starting winning port 13 than the second starting winning port 14. In the state where the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the closed state, it may be configured that the winning is possible (that is, it is difficult for the gaming ball to win) although it is difficult to win a prize.

  Hereinafter, the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a start winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is very likely to win the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly under the effect display device 9, but the interval between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first start winning opening 13 is further reduced, or the first start winning opening is set. The winning percentage of the second starting prize opening 14 is such that the nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting prize opening 13 is difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting prize opening 13. This may be made higher than the winning rate of the first start winning opening 13.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the variable winning ball apparatus 15 that opens and closes only the second start winning opening 14 is provided. Any of the start winning ports 14 may be provided with a variable winning ball device that performs an opening / closing operation.

  Above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 13, that is, the first reserved memory number (the reserved memory, the start memory or the start prize memory) Also provided is a first special symbol storage memory display 18a comprising four displays for displaying. The first special symbol storage memory indicator 18a increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, above the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, there are four indicators for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, that is, the second reserved memory number. A second special symbol storage memory display 18b is provided. The second special symbol storage memory display 18b increases the number of indicators to be lit by 1 every time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of indicators to be turned on is reduced by one.

  In addition, at the lower part of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is provided a total pending storage display unit 18c for displaying the total number (total number of pending pending storage) that is the sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. ing. In this embodiment, the total pending storage display unit 18c that displays the total number is provided, so that it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that have not met the variable display start condition. . In this embodiment, in the total hold memory display unit 18c, the first hold memory and the second hold memory are displayed as images imitating game balls to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, respectively. They are displayed in order of winning, and are displayed in a manner in which it is possible to recognize whether they are the first reserved memory or the second reserved memory (for example, the first reserved memory is displayed in a red frame, and the second reserved memory is (Displayed in blue frame).

  In this embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit 18c, a normal display mode indicating the reliability for the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit, and an effect suggesting execution of a predetermined effect A suggestion display mode is provided.

  The normal display mode includes “white” displayed in white, “red” displayed in red, and “gold” displayed in gold, and the reliability with respect to 15R / 8R probability variation big hit. Is gold> red> white.

  In the effect suggestion display mode, a special zone effect is displayed by displaying the first special suggestion mode indicating that the special zone effect is to be notified by displaying the character “special” and the character “special?”. A second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is a subject of notice, a pseudo-link suggestion mode that suggests executing a pseudo-ream by displaying the characters “NEXT”, and displaying the characters “SP” SP suggestion mode that suggests the development of super reach. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is to be notified, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is to be notified. It is a display mode to obtain. Further, the pseudo-suggestion suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-sequential execution is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super-reach is developed.

  The special zone effect is an effect that displays a special background that is different from a normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. Further, the special zone effect is configured such that the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to 15R / 8R probability variation big hit. Hereinafter, starting execution of a special zone effect may be referred to as “entering a special zone”. Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The successful entry effect is an effect indicating that it has been confirmed that it has entered the special zone after suggesting that it has entered the special zone (for example, as shown in FIGS. 49 (4) and (5) described later, “Special” “Zone chance!” Is displayed and “Success!” Is displayed). Also, when the player does not enter the special zone, a rush failure effect that gives the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player has entered the special zone may be executed. For example, after suggesting entering the special zone in the same manner as the successful entry effect, an effect indicating that the special zone is not entered (for example, “special zone chance!” Is displayed and “failure ...” is displayed. Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the rush success effect and the rush failure effect may be collectively referred to as “rush notice effect”. The rush advance notice effect is an effect performed over 3 seconds from the start of the change. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of the change (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change for executing the rush notice effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the rush notice effect is forcibly terminated one second before the change stop. At this time, when entering the special zone, the successful entry effect is forcibly terminated and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in this embodiment, the summed hold storage display unit 18c performs a hold display for the hold storage that has not yet been changed, and after the start of the change display for the hold storage until the end thereof, The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit 18d different from the combined hold storage display unit 18c. In other words, the active display unit 18d displays an active display (a variable display-corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed. The active display is an image showing the reliability with respect to the occurrence of a big hit based on the fluctuation during execution. As the display mode of the active display, the same display mode as the above-described hold display (“white”, “red”, “gold” which are normal display modes, the first special suggestion mode and the second special display mode which are production suggestion display modes) Suggestion mode, pseudo-link suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode).

  In this embodiment, the display mode for displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning a prize). Specifically, when a start winning is generated, first, the change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing described later) is determined, and then whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode is determined. To do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning prize. In addition, when it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, when the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning prize, and the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone production, 5 seconds after re-variation in the pseudo-ream, 5 seconds after starting the super reach), or when it is decided not to execute (for example, entry failure) When an effect is executed, the display mode changes to a normal suggestion display mode.

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effects) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. A variable display of the effect symbol as the symbol is performed. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display device 9 reminds the jackpot The combination of is stopped and displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a special variable winning ball device 20 is provided below the variable winning ball device 15. The special variable winning ball apparatus 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b. When the open / close plate is controlled to be open by the solenoid 21 in the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when the symbol is derived and displayed, the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the big winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  A normal symbol display 10 is provided on the left side of the game board 6. The normal symbol display 10 variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (for example, “◯” and “x”) called normal symbols.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started. In this embodiment, variable display is performed by alternately lighting the upper and lower lamps (the symbols can be visually recognized when turned on). For example, if the lower lamp is turned on at the end of the variable display, it is a hit. . When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In other words, the state of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is a state that is advantageous from a disadvantageous state for the player when the normal symbol is a stop symbol (a state in which a game ball can be awarded at the second start winning port 14). To change. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol holding storage display 41 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Each time there is a game ball passing through the gate 32, that is, every time a game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol storage memory display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Each time variable display on the normal symbol display 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be lit is reduced by one. In addition, a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit compared to the normal state is a high probability state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a variation display result of a special symbol is increased compared to the normal state) However, with the exception of the high probability / low base state described later), the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball apparatus 15 are increased. .

  On the left and right sides of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there are provided decorative LEDs 25 that are displayed blinking during the game, and at the lower part there is an outlet 26 for taking in a hit ball that has not won. In addition, two speakers 27 that utter sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the left and right upper portions outside the game area 7. On the outer periphery of the game area 7, a frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided.

  In the gaming machine, a ball striking device (not shown) that drives a driving motor in response to a player operating the batting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the driving motor to launch a gaming ball to the gaming area 7. ) Is provided. A game ball launched from the ball striking device enters the game area 7 through a ball striking rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 1), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the first start winning opening 13. If the variable display of the first special symbol cannot be started, the first reserved memory number is increased by 1 on the condition that the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second start opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the special symbol variable display ends, 2), the second special symbol display 8b starts variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 9 starts variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to winning in the second start winning opening 14. If the variable display of the second special symbol cannot be started, the second reserved memory number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value.

  In this embodiment, when a big hit of a predetermined type is reached, the game state is shifted to a so-called probability change state after the big hit game is finished, the game state is shifted to a high probability state, and the game ball is easy to start winning (that is, Then, a transition is made to the high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that variable display execution conditions in the special symbol indicators 8a and 8b and the effect display device 9 are easily established. In the high base state, for example, the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is increased or the time in which the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended compared to the case in which the high base state is not in the high base state. It becomes easier to win a start. In this embodiment, when a big hit is made, the state is always shifted to a high probability state. However, when a big hit is made, in addition to the high probability state, a so-called time-short state (for example, a low probability state, and The gaming machine may be configured so as to be shifted to a high base state.

  Instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is in the open state (also referred to as the open extended state), the normal symbol display unit 10 shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display unit 10 will be a hit symbol is increased. Depending on the situation, the high base state may be entered. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (winning symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times. In this case, by performing the transition control to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency at which the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability changing state is entered, the opening time and the number of opening times of the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and a state where it is easy to start a winning (high base state) is achieved. That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probabilistic symbol. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Moreover, you may transfer to a high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time short state where the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is shortened. In the normal symbol short-time state, the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the variation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, when the frequency that the normal symbol is hit increases, the frequency that the variable winning ball apparatus 15 is opened is increased, and the start winning state is easily set (high base state).

  In addition, the change time of special symbols and production symbols will be shortened by shifting to the short time state when the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and production symbols is shortened. The frequency of being played (in other words, the digestion of the reserved memory becomes faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, an effective start winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game being increased.

  Furthermore, by making transitions to all the states shown above (open extended state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state), it will be easier to win a start (shift to a high base state). May be. In addition, it is easier to win a start (high base) by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). Transition to a state). In addition, it is easier to win a start by shifting to any one of the above states (open extended state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol short time state, and special symbol short time state). You may make it move to a base state.

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. FIG. 2 also shows a payout control board 37, an effect control board 80, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted on the main board 31. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a game control (game progress control) program and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations in accordance with the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or built-in. The I / O port unit 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates hardware random numbers (random numbers generated by the hardware circuit).

  The RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply substrate 910. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 55 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag and a high probability flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up.

  In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit that is used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to win a jackpot based on a display result of variable symbol special display. The random number circuit 503 updates numerical data in accordance with a set update rule within a numerical range in which an initial value (for example, 0) and an upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and starts at a random timing Based on the fact that the winning time is the reading (extraction) of the numerical data, it has a random number generation function in which the numerical data to be read becomes a random value.

  The random number circuit 503 includes a numeric data update range selection setting function (initial value selection setting function and upper limit value selection setting function), numeric data update rule selection setting function, and numeric data update rule selection. It has various functions such as a switching function. With such a function, the randomness of the generated random numbers can be improved.

  Further, the game control microcomputer 560 has a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 560 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 54 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 560). The numerical data obtained by the execution is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 503. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 503 can be further improved.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 that provides detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 to the game control microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. The main board also includes an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560. 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560 includes a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b that variably displays special symbols, a normal symbol display 10 that variably displays normal symbols, and a first special symbol hold memory. Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol storage memory display 18b, and the normal symbol storage memory display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs information output signals such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 160 is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (configured by the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. An effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 for variably displaying effect symbols is performed.

  The effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35 and from the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the audio output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 includes an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information related to effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be externally attached. In this embodiment, the RAM in the production control microcomputer 100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates in accordance with a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a capture signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the (effect control INT signal), an effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that performs display control of the effect display device 9 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 100 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the production control microcomputer 100, and maps a VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for developing image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs to the VDP 109 a command for reading out necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols (including effect symbols), and background image data in advance. ROM. The VDP 109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to the instruction from the effect control CPU 101. The VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 on the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulating means.

  As a signal direction regulating means, the signal inputted from the main board 31 is allowed to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (the signal is not passed in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. For example, a diode or a transistor is used as the unidirectional circuit. FIG. 3 illustrates a diode. A unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Furthermore, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 that is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit that is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the relay board 77 side).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a player's operation action on the push button 120 has been detected from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the production control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action with respect to the operation rod of the stick controller 122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105 to cause the stick controller 122 to vibrate.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the production control CPU 101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitter such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates voice or sound effect according to the sound number data, and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplification circuit 705 outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706 to the speaker 27. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output form of the sound effect or sound in a time series in a predetermined period (for example, the changing period of the effect design).

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After executing a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and a stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) is performed (step S4), the RAM is accessible (Step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is This mode indicates an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks the state of the output signal (clear signal) of a clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S6). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing of the backup RAM area (for example, power supply stop processing such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped (Step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed, for example, by the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  When it is confirmed that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 performs data check of the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is not performed when the power supply is stopped.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 recovers the game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electrical component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Process). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing in steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The parts that should not be initialized include, for example, data indicating a gaming state before stopping power supply (special symbol process flag, high probability flag, high base flag, etc.), and an area (output) where the output state of the output port is saved Port buffer), a portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid winning balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit, small hit or out) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 80. (Step S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, for example, when the value of a special symbol pointer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM, the CPU 56 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13). You may make it do. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may resume the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the value of a variable time timer (to be described later) is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, measurement of the saved variation time timer value is resumed, and the variation display of the special symbol is resumed and saved. When the value of the changed time timer has timed out, a symbol determination designation command to be described later is further transmitted. In this embodiment, a special symbol process flag value, which will be described later, is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is recovered, the special symbol process is resumed from the process corresponding to the value of the stored special symbol process flag.

  Note that the display result designation command is not necessarily transmitted when the power failure is restored, but the CPU 56 may first confirm whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is zero. . If the value of the variation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the variation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the state has not been reached, and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that the power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs at the time of the power failure. The display result designation command may not be transmitted because it is determined that it is not in the middle.

  In this embodiment, it is confirmed whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored using both the backup flag and the check data. However, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). The RAM clear process initializes predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. In addition, the entire area of the RAM 55 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, count value data of a counter for generating a random number for normal symbol determination) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

  By the processing in steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per-determining random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively performing processing according to the control state are initialized. Value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed an initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been performed, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting of the random number circuit 503 (step S14). For example, the CPU 56 performs setting according to the random number circuit setting program to cause the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  In step S15, the CPU 56 sets a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S18) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt disabled state is set (step S16). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are finished, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether to reach when it is not a big hit, The random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process for updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to win for a normal symbol (normal random number generation counter for normal symbol determination). It is a random number to determine. A game control process for controlling the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls game devices such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, a ball payout device, etc. provided in the game machine itself. In the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, or a game machine control process), the count value of the random number for determination per normal symbol is one round (the random number for determination per normal symbol is taken). When the value is incremented by the number of values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In this embodiment, the reach effect is executed using effect symbols that are variably displayed on the effect display device 9. In addition, when the display result of the special symbol is a jackpot symbol, a reach effect is executed. Note that, in the case of a sudden probability change big hit, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) may be stopped and displayed instead of reaching. When the display result of the special symbol is not a jackpot symbol, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether to execute the reach effect by performing a lottery to determine the variation pattern type and variation pattern using random numbers. To do. However, it is the production control microcomputer 100 that actually executes the reach production control.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process for detecting whether or not a power-off signal is output (whether or not an on-state is turned on) is executed (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when a power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supplied to the gaming machine. In the power-off detection process, when detecting that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes a power supply stop process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, detection signals from the gate switch 32a, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 has a first special symbol display 8a, a second special symbol display 8b, a normal symbol display 10, a first special symbol hold storage display 18a, a second special symbol hold storage display 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the on-hold storage display 41 is executed (step S22). About the 1st special symbol display 8a, the 2nd special symbol display 8b, and the normal symbol display 10, a drive signal is output with respect to each display according to the content of the output buffer set by step S32, S33. Execute control.

  Also, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each random number for determination such as a random number for determination per ordinary symbol used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol process processing (step S26). In the special symbol process, corresponding processing is executed according to a special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol indicator 8a, the second special symbol indicator 8b, and the special winning award in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Next, normal symbol process processing is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (effect control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs information output processing for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer, for example (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on detection signals from the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a and the count switch 23 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 81 in accordance with a payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

  In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. However, the CPU 56 relates to on / off of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents are output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs special symbol display control processing for setting special symbol display control data for effect display of the special symbol in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data according to the value of the special symbol process flag ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting normal symbol display control data for effect display of the normal symbol in an output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data according to the value of the normal symbol process flag ( Step S33). For example, when the start flag related to the variation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 56 switches the display state (“◯” and “×”) for the variation rate of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. With such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs a normal signal on the normal symbol display 10 by outputting a drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

  Thereafter, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is terminated.

  With the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the processes in steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process. However, in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed by the main process. May be executed.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. There may be a case where a predetermined combination of effects that does not reach reach is stopped and displayed without reaching reach. Such a variable display mode of the effect symbol is referred to as a variable display mode of “non-reach” (also referred to as “ordinary shift” or “non-reach shift”) in the case where the variable display result is a loss pattern.

  When the shifted symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the effect display device 9, the variable display state of the effect symbol is started after the variable display of the effect symbol is started. After reaching the reach state, a reach effect is executed, and a combination of predetermined effect symbols that do not eventually become a jackpot symbol may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the effect design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach out”) when the variable display result is “out of”.

  In this embodiment, when the big win symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the reach effect is executed after the variable display state of the effect symbol becomes the reach state. Finally, the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas 9L, 9C, and 9R in the effect display device 9 (provided that the probability sudden hit is sudden) In some cases, the probability change big hit symbol (for example, “135”) is stopped and displayed without reaching reach).

  When “5”, which is a small hit, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b, the effect display variable display mode is “suddenly probable big hit” on the effect display device 9. In the same manner as in the case where the effect symbol is variably displayed, a predetermined small hit symbol (the same symbol as the sudden probability variation big hit symbol, for example, "135") may be stopped and displayed. The display effect in the effect display device 9 corresponding to the fact that “5”, which is the small hit symbol, is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol indicator 8b is referred to as a “small hit” variable display mode. .

  Here, the small win is a hit that is allowed up to a small number of times that the big winning opening is opened compared to the big win (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). When the small hit game ends, the game state does not change. That is, there is no transition from the probability variation state to the normal state or from the normal state to the certain variation state. In addition, the sudden probability change big hit is allowed up to a small number of times of opening of the big prize opening in the big hit gaming state (in this embodiment, opening for 0.1 second is twice), but the opening time of the big prize opening is extremely It is a big jackpot that is a short jackpot and the game state after the big jackpot game is shifted to a probabilistic state (that is, by doing so, it appears to the player as if it suddenly became a probable state) Is). In other words, in this embodiment, the sudden winning odds and the small wins have the same opening pattern of the big prize opening. By controlling in such a way, if the winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, it is impossible to recognize whether it is suddenly a big hit or a small hit, so a high probability state for the player (Probable change state) can be expected, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, when it is configured so that all the big hit types are probable big hits, it is not necessary to provide the small hits. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits, as shown in this embodiment, as shown in this embodiment, only the transition to the high probability state and the sudden probable change without the high base state. It is preferable to provide a big hit.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, the non-reach PA 1-1 to the non-reach are used as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach”. A variation pattern of reach PA1-5 is prepared. Further, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 are variations patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out of” and the variable display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. Fluctuation patterns of Super PA3-1 to Super PA3-2 and Super PB3-1 to Super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, about the fluctuation pattern of non-reach PA1-4 accompanied with the effect of the pseudo | simulation series used when not reaching, re-change is performed once. Of the variation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition, when normal PB2-1 is used, re-variation is performed once. Of the variation patterns that are used for reaching and have a pseudo-continuous effect, when normal PB2-2 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 among the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-rendition effects, re-variation is performed three times. Note that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again after temporarily stopping the effect symbol that is once deviated from the start of the variable display of the effect symbol until the display result is derived and displayed. .

  Also, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 are used as the variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable symbol display result of the special symbol is a big hit symbol or a small hit symbol. -3 to Normal PB2-4, Super PA3-3 to SuperPA3-4, Super PB3-3 to Super PB3-4, Special PG1-1 to Special PG1-3, Special PG2-1 to Special PG2-2 Is prepared. In FIG. 6, the fluctuation patterns of special PG1-1 to special PG1-3 and special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 are fluctuation patterns used when sudden probability change big hit or small hit. Further, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the fluctuation patterns that are used when the sudden sudden change is not big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, the re-variation is performed once. Of the fluctuation patterns used for reaching and accompanied by pseudo-continuous effects, when normal PB2-4 is used, re-variation is performed twice. Furthermore, when using super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 among the fluctuation patterns that are used for reaching and have the effect of pseudo-ream, re-variation is performed three times. In addition, for the variation pattern of the special PG 1-3 that is used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit and has a pseudo-continuous effect, re-variation is performed once.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when the variation time is fixedly determined according to the type of reach (for example, the variation time is 32 in the case of Super Reach A with pseudo-ream). In the case of Super Reach A without pseudo-ream, the fluctuation time is fixed at 22.75 seconds). For example, even in the case of the same type of Super Reach Depending on the total number of pending storage, the variation time may be varied. For example, even with the same type of super reach, the variation time may be shortened as the total number of pending storage increases. Also, for example, even in the case of the same type of super reach, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the first reserved memory number. When the variable display of the two special symbols is performed, the variable time may be varied according to the second reserved memory number. In this case, a separate determination table is prepared for each value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number (for example, the variation pattern type determination table for the reserved memory numbers 0 to 2 and the reserved memory numbers 3 and 4). For example, a determination table may be selected according to the value of the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number, and the change time may be varied.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (15R probability variation jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): The type (type) of the variation pattern is determined (for variation pattern type determination)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): A variation pattern (variation time) is determined (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining the initial value of random 4)

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern is first determined using the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and then the variation pattern determined using the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). One of the variation patterns included in the pattern type is determined. Thus, in this embodiment, the variation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

  The variation pattern type is a group of a plurality of variation patterns according to the characteristics of the variation mode. For example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by reach type, and include a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach A, and a variation pattern with super reach B. It may be divided into variable pattern types. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns are grouped by the number of re-variations of pseudo-continuations, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern without pseudo-ream, a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of one re-variation, It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of two variations and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of three variations. Further, for example, a plurality of variation patterns may be grouped according to the presence or absence of a predetermined effect such as a pseudo ream or a slip effect.

  In this embodiment, as will be described later, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, normal reach and pseudo-ream They are classified into normal CA3-2, which is a variation pattern type including the accompanying variation pattern, and super CA3-3, which is a variation pattern type involving super reach. In addition, in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and special CA4-2 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach. ing. Further, in the case of small hits, it is classified into special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern. Further, in the case of deviation, it is a non-reach CA 2-1 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern that does not involve reach and a predetermined effect, and a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that does not involve reach but has a predetermined effect. Non-reach CA2-2, non-reach CA2-3 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of a shortened variation with no reach and a predetermined effect, and normal CA2-4 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only a normal reach And normal CA2-5 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and two re-variation pseudo-continuations, and normal CA2 which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with one normal reach and one re-variation pseudo-continuation -6 and super CA2-7 which is a variation pattern type with super reach Are the type divided into.

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 uses a counter for generating (1) a big hit type determination random number and (4) a normal symbol determination random number. Count up (add 1). That is, they are determination random numbers, and other random numbers are display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or initial value random numbers (random 5). In addition, in order to improve a game effect, you may use random numbers other than said random number. In this embodiment, a random number generated by hardware incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 (or hardware external to the game control microcomputer 560) is used as the jackpot determination random number. Note that a software random number instead of a hardware random number may be used as the jackpot determination random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal-time jackpot determination table used in a normal state (a gaming state that is not a probability change state) and a probability change jackpot determination table used in a probability change state. Each value described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the normal jackpot determination table, and each value described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A) is set in the probability change jackpot determination table. Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  In this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit in the big hit lottery is increased, and is also changed to a high base state. There are two cases: a state that is only transferred to a state and a state that is not transferred to a high base state (which is a low base state). Is a jackpot determination table for probability variation, and a normal jackpot determination table is used in other cases. As will be described later, in this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit is reached, after the big hit game is finished, the high probability state and the high base state are entered. After the big hit, the probability variation state and the high base state continue until the variation display is terminated 70 times. In addition, when the odd hit suddenly becomes a big hit, after the big hit game is finished, the high base state is shifted to the high probability state. After the big hit, the probability variation state continues until the variation display is terminated 70 times. Therefore, in this embodiment, after the big hit of the sudden probability change big hit, until the end of the 70th fluctuation display, only the high probability state is transferred and the high base state is not transferred (in the low base state). There is a case where there is a certain variation state.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54 and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and a small hit determination table used when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. (For the second special symbol). Each value described in FIG. 8B is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol), the values shown in FIG. Each numerical value listed is set. Moreover, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are small hit determination values.

  Note that it may be determined that a small hit is made only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, and the small hit may not be provided when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. In this case, the small hit determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted to the probability changing state, the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. Even if the game state is shifted to the probability change state, a small hit will be generated, and if it is configured to produce an effect asking whether or not the probability change will occur, even though the current game state is the probability change state On the contrary, it makes the player feel annoying. Therefore, if it is configured so that the small hit does not occur during the variation display of the second special symbol, if the gaming state is the probability variation state, it is difficult for the small hit to occur and the excessive effect is not given to the probability variation. This can prevent the player from feeling annoyed.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R). The big hit determination random number is shown in FIG. If it matches any of the big hit determination values, the special symbol is decided to be big hit (15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later). Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. Note that the “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, “probabilities” shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C indicate the probability (ratio) of small hits. Further, deciding whether or not to win a jackpot means deciding whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot symbol. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit gaming state, but stopping in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. It also means determining whether or not the symbol is to be a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/300. On the other hand, when using the small hit determination table (second special symbol), a case where the small hit is determined at a ratio of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. The ratio determined as “small hit” is higher than when the variable display is executed.

  FIGS. 8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. FIG. Among these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball having won the first start winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). This is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a. Further, FIG. 8E shows a case where the jackpot type is determined using the holding memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 14 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). Is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, based on the random number (random 1) for determining the jackpot type, This table is referred to in order to determine either “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, ten determination values are assigned to “suddenly probable big hit” in the big hit type determination table 131a (40 minutes). In the jackpot type determination table 131b, five judgment values are assigned to the “sudden probability variation jackpot” (a ratio of 5/40). Will suddenly be determined to be a promising big hit). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning prize is given to the first start winning opening 13 and the first special symbol variation display is executed, the start winning prize is given to the second starting winning prize slot 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the ratio determined as “suddenly probable big hit” is high. Note that “sudden probability variation big hit” is assigned only to the first special symbol jackpot type determination table 131a, and “sudden probability variation big hit” is not assigned to the second special symbol big hit type determination table 131b (ie. It may be determined that “suddenly probable big hit” may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 (D) and 8 (E), a sudden probability variation big hit as the first specific gaming state to which a predetermined amount of game value is given and an amount larger than the game value There are cases where the 15th round probability change big hit “15R probability change big hit” and the 8th round probability change big hit “8R probability change big hit” are determined as the second specific gaming state to which the game value is given. Although the case where it is determined that the first specific gaming state is determined at a high rate when it is executed is shown, the gaming value to be given is not limited to the number of rounds as shown in this embodiment. For example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the allowable amount of the winning number (count number) of game balls to the big winning opening per round is increased as the gaming value is determined. Also good. Further, for example, as compared with the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state in which the opening time of the big winning opening per game during the big hit may be determined as the gaming value. In addition, for example, even if the same 15 round big hits, the first specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening once per round and the second specific gaming state that opens the big winning opening multiple times per round It may be prepared to increase the gaming value of the second specific gaming state by substantially increasing the number of times the special winning opening is opened. In this case, for example, in any case of the first specific gaming state or the second specific gaming state, when the big winning opening is opened 15 times (in this case, all 15 rounds in the case of the first specific gaming state) In the case of the second specific gaming state, there is an undigested round remaining), and it is possible to execute an effect in such a manner as to inquire whether or not the jackpot continues further. And in the case of the first specific gaming state, all the 15 rounds have been finished internally, so the big hit game is finished, and in the case of the second specific gaming state, there remains an undigested round internally. For this reason, the jackpot game may be continued (the effect that the bonus winning opening is additionally started with a bonus after finishing the bonus hit of 15 times).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, there are “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit” and “sudden probability variation big hit” as the big hit types. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is three types of 15 rounds, 8 rounds, and 2 rounds. However, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game. It is not limited to those shown in the form. For example, a 7R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a seven-round jackpot game and a 5R probability variable jackpot that is controlled for a five-round jackpot game may be provided. In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpot types: “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit”. The above jackpot type may be provided. Conversely, the jackpot type may be less than three types, for example, only two types may be provided as the jackpot type.

  “15R probable big hit” is a big hit that is controlled to 15 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the high base state and high base The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “8R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to an eight-round jackpot gaming state, and shifts to a probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state ends (in this embodiment, the base is shifted to a high probability state and has a high base. The state is also shifted (see steps S166 to S170 described later). Then, after the transition to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high base state and the high probability state are terminated (see steps S168, S144, steps S170, S140).

  The “sudden probability change big hit” is the number of times that the special winning opening is less than the “15R probability change big hit” or “8R probability change big hit” (in this embodiment, the opening for 0.1 seconds is twice). The jackpot allowed up to. In other words, when “suddenly promising big hit”, the game is controlled to a two round big hit gaming state. Also, in the case of “15R probable big hit” or “8R probable big hit”, the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in “sudden probable big hit”, the winning prize opening per round is long. The opening time is as short as 0.1 seconds, and it is almost impossible to expect a game ball to win a big prize during the big hit game. In this embodiment, after the sudden probability change big hit gaming state is finished, the state is changed to the probability change state (in this embodiment, the high base state is not changed and only the high probability state is changed). Then, after shifting to the probability variation state, when the variation display is terminated 70 times, the high probability state is terminated.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even in the case of “small hit”, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds, and the big hit gaming state by “suddenly probable big hit” Similar control is performed. In the case of “small hit”, the game state does not change after the opening of the big winning opening twice, and the game state before “small hit” is maintained. By doing so, it is made impossible to recognize whether it is “suddenly promising big hit” or “small hit”, and the interest of the game is improved. As shown in this embodiment, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits (in this embodiment, 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit), there is no need to provide a small hit. Good. In addition, when the big hit types are all probabilistic big hits as in this embodiment, when a small hit is provided, only sudden transition with high base state without high base state is performed. It is preferable to provide it (the opening pattern of the big prize opening is also the same for the case of sudden probability change big hit and small hit).

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b are numerical values to be compared with a random value of 1, which corresponds to each of “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, and “sudden probability variation big hit” (big hit type Judgment value) is set. When the value of random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type as a type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  In this embodiment, as described above, only the jackpot type that shifts to the high probability state is included, but it is also possible to have a jackpot that does not shift to the high probability state (so-called normal jackpot). In addition, when transitioning to a high probability state, the high probability state is terminated by transitioning to the normal state triggered by a predetermined number of fluctuation displays. It is good also as a structure which complete | finishes a high-probability state by not changing a frequency | count limitation in a state but shifting to a normal state when a normal jackpot occurs.

  Further, in this embodiment, although it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, it is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a sphere does not easily pass.

  In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit occurs, the high probability state and the high base state are shifted. Although it is configured to end, the number of variable displays from the transition to each gaming state to the end may not be the same in the high probability state and the high base state. For example, the high base state may be ended when 70 fluctuation displays are ended after the big hit is ended, and the high probability state may be ended when 71 fluctuation displays are ended.

  Further, in this embodiment, when a sudden probability change big hit occurs, the high base state is not changed to only the high probability state after the big hit ends, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similarly to the occurrence of the probable big hit, it is possible to shift between the probable change state and the high base state. Moreover, it is good also as determining whether it transfers to a high base state based on the gaming state at the time of sudden probability change big hit. For example, if suddenly probable big hits occur in the high base state, it shifts to the high base state. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize which winning has occurred.

  9A to 9C are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol, the variation pattern type is determined according to the determination result of the jackpot type, and a random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C includes numerical values (determination values) to be compared with random number (random 2) values for variation pattern type determination, including normal CA3-1, normal CA3-2, A determination value corresponding to any one of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit” and the big hit type shown in FIG. The allocation of determination values for the variation pattern types of normal CA 3-1, normal CA 3-2, and super CA 3-3 is different from the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132 B shown in B).

  As described above, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each fluctuation pattern type is different according to the big hit type. Also, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of whether the big hit type is a plurality of types, and the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied.

  As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, in this embodiment, when “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, the random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2) If the value of 150 is 251, it can be seen that the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed.

  In addition, for the super reach big hit, the variation pattern type with pseudo-continuity (variation pattern type including the variation pattern of Super PA3-3 and Super PA3-4) and the variation pattern type without super-continuity (Super PB3-3, Super It may be divided into a variation pattern type including a variation pattern of PB3-4. In this case, in both the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for 8R probability variation big hit and the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for 15R probability variation big hit, the variation pattern type with super reach and quasi-ream, super reach and pseudo A variation pattern type not associated with a series is assigned.

  In the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, for example, when the big hit type such as special CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is other than “suddenly probable big hit”. A determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “suddenly probable big hit”, the control is made to the big hit state with 15R positive variable big hit or 8R positive variable big hit. Can be determined for different variation pattern types.

  FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D has a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit symbol. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9D, when it is determined to be a small hit, the case where the special CA4-1 is determined as the variation pattern type is shown. .

  FIGS. 10A to 10D are explanatory diagrams showing the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D. Among these, FIG. 10 (A) shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. FIG. 10B shows a loss variation pattern type determination table 135B used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. FIG. 10C shows a high probability / high base state (a state from the end of big hit by 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit until the end of the 70th variation display) in the gaming state is probability variation state. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C used in this case is shown. Further, FIG. 10D is used when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state (a state from the end of the big hit due to sudden probability variation big hit to the end of the 70th variation display) in the probability variation state. A deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D is shown. The deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135D have a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is an off-design. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine any of the above.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (C) and 10 (D), in this embodiment, even in the case of the probability variation state, when the fluctuation display after the big hit end by the sudden probability variation big hit is performed, the 15R probability variation big hit is performed. Compared with the case where the fluctuation display after the big hit is completed by the 8R probability variation big hit, the ratio of the fluctuation pattern with super reach is selected is high. By doing so, in this embodiment, in the high probability state after the big hit by suddenly probable big hit, the player for the high probability state is displayed with high probability in the high probability state. Has increased expectations.

  In addition, a game for a big hit just before the end of the probability variation state is configured by increasing the ratio of the super reach from the variation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) to the last variation display. It is good also to raise a person's expectation. In this case, for example, at the end of the big hit, 75 times are set in a high probability number counter and a high base number counter described later (for example, 75 is set in both the high probability number counter and the high base number counter, and 75 times The high probability / high base state may continue until the fluctuation display is completed. The high probability count counter is set to 75, the high base count counter is set to 70, and the probability variation state ends. Control may be performed with a high probability / low base state from the previous to the last fluctuation display, and control is performed with a high probability / low base state from the five fluctuations before the probability variation state ends to the last fluctuation display. In this case, the variation pattern type determination for detachment is performed by checking the high probability flag and the high base flag according to the same control as that shown in this embodiment. Tables 135C and 135D may be selected (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). At the start of the variable display, the values of the high probability count counter and the high base count counter remain at a predetermined number (for example, 5). ) Or less (whether or not the remaining number of probability variation states is within a predetermined number), and if it is within a predetermined number (for example, 5), the super shown in FIG. The deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D with an increased reach ratio is selected. If the counter value is still greater than a predetermined number (for example, 5), the variation pattern type determination table 135C for deviation shown in FIG. May be selected. In addition, the control method in the case where it is configured to increase the ratio of the super reach from the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times before the probability variation state ends (for example, five times before) is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, 71 is set in the high probability count counter in the same manner as in this embodiment, and conversely, 66 is set in the high base count counter. Is controlled to a high probability / low base state, and by confirming whether the value of the high probability count counter is within 5 or less, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for loss are selected. May be. Further, the number of fluctuations after the big hit may not be determined based on the count value of the high probability number counter or the high base number counter, but may be determined using another counter. For example, a counter that counts the number of fluctuations after the end of the big hit game is provided, and whether the count value of the counter is within a predetermined range (for example, 71 to 75 or 66 to 71) is confirmed. It may be determined whether the state is between five changes before the end of the state and the last change display, and the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D may be selected. In addition, when the configuration is such that the high-probability / low-base state is controlled from the change display a predetermined number of times before the probability change state ends (for example, five times before) to the end of the last change display. In the variation pattern setting process, the variation pattern type determination tables 135C and 135D for detachment may be selected according to the state of the high probability flag or the high base flag (see steps S95, S96, S100, and S101). ).

  In the example shown in FIG. 10, a case where separate variation pattern type determination tables 135 </ b> B to 135 </ b> D are used for the case where the gaming state is the high base state and the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more is shown. However, the common deviation variation pattern type determination table may be used in the case of the high base state and in the case where the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. In the example shown in FIG. 10C, the common high base deviation variation pattern type determination table 135C is used regardless of the total number of reserved storage, but the high base deviation variation pattern is used. As the type determination table, a plurality of variation pattern determination tables for deviation corresponding to the total number of pending storages (tables with different ratios of determination values) may be used.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the total pending storage number is less than 3 and the total pending storage number is 3 or more. In this example, two types of tables are used, namely, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135B. However, the method of dividing the variation variation pattern type determination table is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, a separate deviation variation pattern type determination table may be provided for each value of the total pending storage number (that is, for the total pending storage number 0, for the total pending storage number 1, for the total pending storage number 2) , The deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 3, for the total pending storage number 4... May be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values stored in the total number of pending storages may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the total pending storage number 0-2, the total pending storage number 3, the total pending storage number 4,... May be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, a case is shown in which a plurality of deviation variation pattern type determination tables are provided according to the total number of reserved storages, but deviation variation pattern type determination is performed according to the first and second reserved memory numbers. A plurality of tables may be provided. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, a deviation variation pattern type determination table prepared separately for each value of the first reserved memory number may be used (that is, the first reserved memory number). The deviation variation pattern type determination table for 0, for the first reserved memory number, for the first reserved memory number for 2, for the first reserved memory number for three, for the first reserved memory number for four, etc. Each may be used separately). Further, for example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table corresponding to a combination of a plurality of other values of the first reserved storage number may be used. For example, a deviation variation pattern type determination table for the first reserved memory number 0 to 2, the first reserved memory number 3, the first reserved memory number 4, and so on may be used. Even in this case, when the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are large (for example, 3 or more), it may be configured such that a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with a short variation time is easily selected. . Even in such a case, a common determination value may be assigned to a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach as a specific variable display pattern.

  Note that “specific performance mode” refers to a variation pattern type or variation pattern that has a high expectation level for at least big hits, such as a fluctuation pattern with super reach, and can give the player a sense of expectation for the big hit. It is. In addition, the “expected degree (reliability) for the big hit” indicates an appearance rate (probability) that the big hit appears when variable display (for example, variable display with super reach) according to the specific performance mode is executed. ing. For example, the expectation degree of jackpot when the variable display with super reach is executed is determined as (the rate at which super reach is executed when the jackpot is determined) / (when the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot and lost) Is calculated by calculating the rate at which super reach is performed on both.

  Each of the deviation variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135B includes a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random number (random 2) value for variation pattern type determination, which is non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 3, a determination value corresponding to one of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6 and super CA2-7 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the normal state and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 230 to 251, it can be seen that variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storage.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is out of the game and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 79, it can be seen that the fluctuation display of the normal fluctuation is executed at least without the reach (without the predetermined effect such as the pseudo ream and the slide effect) regardless of the total number of reserved storage. Due to such a table configuration, in this embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination table 135A, 135B) includes at least one of the variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). Regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, combined reserved memory number) stored in the reserved memory means (first reserved memory buffer or second reserved memory buffer) for a part, Common determination values (1 to 79 in the examples shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) are assigned. Note that the “variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern” means, as shown in this embodiment, for example, a variable display result without a reach, without a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slide effect. Is a variable display pattern (fluctuation pattern) that is used when the big hit is not a big hit.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, the case where the common big hit variation pattern type determination table is used regardless of the current gaming state is shown. Depending on whether it is a normal state, you may make it use the variation pattern type determination table for big hits prepared separately, respectively. In this embodiment, when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern for shortening variation is determined by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for shortening shown in FIG. 10B. Although the case where it is configured so that there is a case is shown, the total number of reserved memories (the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number may be used) when the variation pattern of the shortening variation can be selected according to the current gaming state ) May be different. For example, when the gaming state is the normal state, when the total number of reserved memory is 3 (or when the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number is 2, for example), When the variation pattern type of shortening variation is selected by selecting the variation pattern type determination table for loss, and the gaming state is a high base state, the case of 1 or 2 having a smaller total number of pending storage However (or, for example, even when the number of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory is smaller 0 or 1), the fluctuation pattern type determination table for shortening is selected to determine the fluctuation pattern of the shortening fluctuation. There may be cases where there are cases.

  FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views showing hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. FIG. The hit fluctuation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B determine the fluctuation pattern according to the determination result of the big hit type or the fluctuation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a random number (random 3). Each of the variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the usage table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 or super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is specially selected. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result indicating that either CA4-1 or special CA4-2 is selected. Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with a random pattern random number (random 3) value according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect symbol is Data (determination value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of “big hit” is included.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11A, as the variation pattern types, normal CA3-1, which is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with only normal reach, and a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with normal reach and pseudo-continuity are used. A case is shown in which a normal CA 3-2 is classified into a normal CA 3-2 and a super CA 3-3 that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with super reach (which may be accompanied by a pseudo-ream). In the example shown in FIG. 11B, as the variation pattern type, a special CA4-1 that is a variation pattern type including a non-reach variation pattern and a special CA4- that is a variation pattern type including a variation pattern with reach are used. 2 shows a case of classification into two. In FIG. 11B, the variation pattern type may be divided according to the presence / absence of a predetermined effect such as a pseudo-ream or a slip effect, instead of being classified according to the presence / absence of reach. In this case, for example, the special CA 4-1 includes a special PG 1-1 and a special PG 2-1 that are variation patterns not accompanied by a predetermined effect, and the special CA 4-2 includes a special PG 1-2 and a special PG 1-2 that have a predetermined effect. You may comprise so that PG1-3 and special PG2-2 may be included.

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing a deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out of”, the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is based on a random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in response to variable display of the special symbol. (Each corresponding to a variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the usable variation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a variation pattern command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the start of variation. Therefore, when receiving the command 80XX (H), the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a big hit, and a big hit type. The effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbols in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C06 (H).

  Command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specifying command (or symbol variation designation command). Note that information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in the variation pattern command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When receiving the symbol confirmation designation command, the effect control microcomputer 100 ends the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol and derives and displays the display result.

  Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, initialization designation is performed. Send a command.

  Command 9F00 (H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

  Commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command). In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, if it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used, and if it is “sudden probability variation big hit” or “small hit”. For small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit a fanfare designation command for sudden start of sudden probability change big hit when it is a sudden chance big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command for small hit. Also good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (special command during opening of a big winning opening) indicating a display during the opening of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round, and the command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10. A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designation command after opening the big winning opening) indicating the closing of the big winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted, a different designation command after opening the special winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when ending the first round during the big hit game, a designation command (A201 (H)) after the big winning opening is designated to designate round 1, and when the tenth round during the big hit game is ended. Is sent after a special winning opening opening command (A20A (H)) for designating round 10.

  The command A301 (H) is an effect control command for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, the end of the jackpot game (a jackpot end designation command: an ending 1 designation command). The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used to end the jackpot game by “15R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”. Command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability change big hit game. Note that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for suddenly probable big hit end designation in the case of sudden probable big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of small hit. Also good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / high base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state. Command B002 (H) is an effect control command (high probability / low base state background designation command) for designating a background display when the gaming state is a high probability / low base state.

  The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning designation command) that designates that the first start winning has been won. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning designation command) for designating that the second starting win has been won. In this embodiment, hereinafter, the first start prize designation command and the second start prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start prize designation command.

  The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number designation command) that designates the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. “XX” in the command C2XX (H) indicates the total pending storage number. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (total pending storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the total pending storage number is decremented by one. In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a total pending memory count subtraction designation command when subtracting the total pending memory count, but does not use the total pending memory count subtraction designation command. When subtracting the total pending storage number, a total pending storage number designation command for designating the total pending storage number after subtraction may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a case is shown in which a combined pending storage number designation command for designating the combined pending storage number is transmitted as a command for designating the reserved storage count. It may be configured to transmit a command for designating the increased number of reserved memories. Specifically, when the first reserved memory increases, a first reserved memory number designation command for designating the first reserved memory number is transmitted, and when the second reserved memory increases, the second reserved memory number is designated. The second reserved memory number designation command may be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, a start winning designation command for designating which one of the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is won is transmitted as the hold storage information, and the total reserved storage number However, the effect control command to be transmitted as the stored storage information is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, when the number of reserved memories increases, a reserved memory number addition designation command (a first reserved memory number addition designation command or a second reserved memory number addition) indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased. When the reserved memory number decreases, the reserved memory number subtraction designation command (the first reserved memory number subtraction designation command or the command indicating that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has decreased) is transmitted. (Second reserved memory number subtraction designation command) may be transmitted.

  Command C4XX (H) and command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (winning determination result designation command) indicating the contents of the determination result at the time of winning. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (symbol design command) that indicates whether or not a big hit, a small hit or not, and a big hit type determination result among the winning determination results. is there. The command C6XX (H) is an effect control command indicating a determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of which determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number is included in the winning determination result. (Variation category command).

  In this embodiment, in the winning effect processing described later (see FIG. 21), the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, a small hit or not, Then, it is determined in which determination value range the random value for determining the variation pattern type falls. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value for designating the big hit or the small hit or a value for designating the type of the big win is set, and control for transmission to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Further, a value for designating a range of a determination value as a determination result is set in the EXT data of the variation category command, and control to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. In this embodiment, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit based on the value set in the symbol designation command, and the type of the big hit, Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a symbol designation command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not a big hit or a small hit is made and the type of the big hit.

  For example, when it is determined that “out of the game” is given in the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (design 1 designating command) in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 2 designation command) in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 3 designation command) in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 5 designation command) in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. For example, when it is determined that the “small hit” is reached, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (design 6 designation command) in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Note that the EXT data set in the symbol designation command and the EXT data set in the display result designation command may be shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to share data to be read when setting a symbol designating command and when setting a display result specifying command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of the contents of the variable category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in this embodiment, which gaming state is displayed, which display result is the display result of the special symbol or effect symbol, the random number for determining the variation pattern type at the time of starting winning A value is set in the EXT data according to whether it is determined that any of the determination values falls within the range, and a variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the gaming state is in the normal state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 79, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which “00 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the non-reach CA2-1 variation pattern type is commonly assigned to the range of determination values 1 to 79 regardless of the total number of pending storage. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize at least that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1 based on the reception of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 100 and 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which “04 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the random number for variation pattern type determination is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is between 215 and 229, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 8 command in which “07 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total pending storage number. Therefore, the production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that at least the variation pattern type is super CA2-7 based on the reception of the variation category 8 command.

  In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the range of the determination values 215 to 229 is within the range of the normal CA 2-5 and the normal CA 2-6 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Since the pattern type is assigned, the production control microcomputer 100 has at least one of the variation pattern types of normal CA 2-5 and normal CA 2-6 based on the reception of the variation category 7 command. Can be recognized. As shown in FIG. 12, when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-5, the normal PB2-2 is always selected as the variation pattern, while when the variation pattern type is normal CA2-6. Since the normal PB2-1 is always selected as the variation pattern, the production control microcomputer 100 determines that the variation pattern with pseudo-continuations is selected based on the reception of the variation category 7 command. Can be recognized.

  Note that the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong are specifically shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. This is derived by picking up values that can be boundaries of the range of determination values assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table for loss. This is the same for the subsequent variation categories 9 to 12 and 21 to 29, and each variation in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D, 10C, and 10D. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of a range of determination values assigned to the pattern type.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / high base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 219. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 219 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-3), the CPU 56 performs the variation in which “08 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Send category 9 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “09 (H)” to the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 220 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7). Send a variable category 10 command.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the gaming state is high probability / low base state and out of place at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type. It is determined whether or not 1 to 79. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is non-reach CA 2-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation in which “0A (H)” is set in the EXT data. A category 11 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “0B (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA2-7). Send a variable category 12 command.

  Even when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state), the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. Good. By doing so, a common determination value can be assigned to the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-7 regardless of the gaming state. For this reason, when executing the process of step S232 of the effect process at the time of winning to be described later, if it is out of place, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the gaming state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. In this case, the game state determination process in step S226 can be made unnecessary.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the “8R probability variation big hit” is obtained at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type becomes 1 to 74. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 74 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for variation pattern type determination is 75 to 149 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). A variation category 22 command is transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 150 to 251 (that is, the variation pattern type of the super CA3-3). A variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Also, for example, when it is determined that the “15R probability variation big hit” is reached at the time of starting winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38. Determine whether or not. When the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 38 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “13 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 39 to 79 (that is, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2). Send a variation category 25 command. Next, the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data when the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 80 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is super CA3-3). A variation category 26 command is transmitted.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, when the variation pattern type is normal CA3-2, normal PB2-3 or normal PB2-4 is selected as the variation pattern. The production control microcomputer 100 can recognize that a variation pattern with a pseudo-ream is selected based on the reception of the variation category 22 command or the variation category 25 command.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the winning odds suddenly become a big win at the start winning, in step S232 of the winning effect processing described later, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100. Determine. When the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 1 to 100 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “16 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 27 commands are transmitted. Next, when the random number for determining the variation pattern type is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which “17 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 28 commands are transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit is made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, the display state of the image display device 9 is changed according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the lamp is changed, and sound number data is output to the audio output board 70. To do.

  For example, the game control microcomputer 560 designates the variation pattern of the effect symbol every time there is a start prize and variable display of the special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b. The variation pattern command and the display result designation command are transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In this embodiment, the effect control command has a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1”, and the first bit (bit 7) of the EXT data is always set to “0”. Note that such a command form is an example, and other command forms may be used. For example, a control command composed of 1 byte or 3 bytes or more may be used.

  In addition, as the transmission method of the effect control command, the effect control command data is output from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80 via the relay board 77 on the eight parallel signal lines of the effect control signals CD0 to CD7, In addition to the effect control command data, a method of outputting a pulse-shaped (rectangular wave-shaped) capture signal (effect control INT signal) for instructing capture of the effect control command data is used. The 8-bit effect control command data of the effect control command is output in synchronization with the effect control INT signal. The effect control microcomputer 100 mounted on the effect control board 80 detects that the effect control INT signal has risen, and starts a 1-byte data capturing process through an interrupt process.

  In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the variable pattern command and the display result designation command are displayed as variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8 a and the second special symbol. Image display that can be used in common with variable display (variation) of the effect symbol corresponding to the variation of the second special symbol on the symbol display 8b, and that produces an effect with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is possible to prevent an increase in the types of commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 100 when controlling the effect parts such as the device 9.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process, the CPU 56 turns on the first start winning opening 13 when the first start opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first start winning opening 13 is turned on. If a winning has occurred, or if the second starting port switch 14a for detecting that a game ball has won the second starting winning port 14 is turned on, that is, the starting winning to the second starting winning port 14 If this occurs, start-port switch passage processing is executed (steps S311 and S312). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning port switch 13a or the second start port switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes in steps S300 to S310 are as follows.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is zero. When the game control microcomputer 560 is in a state where the variable symbol special display can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer (total number of reserved storage). The stored number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the combined hold storage number counter. If the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. In case of big hit, set big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

  Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S301): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of variable display until the display result is derived and displayed (stop display)) Decide to do. Further, control is performed to transmit a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol changing process (step S303): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the variation time timer value becomes 0), the design control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. Control to transmit the specified command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. The effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the fourth symbol when receiving the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S300 (in this example, 0). In this embodiment, as will be described later, a special symbol display control for stopping and displaying a special symbol stop symbol in the special symbol display control process based on the fact that the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data, and the special symbol stop symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer in the display control processing in step S22.

  Preliminary winning opening opening process (step S305): This is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-opening process for the big prize opening, control for opening the big prize opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. In addition, control is performed to transmit the special winning opening open designation command to the production control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for the big prize opening is executed for each round, but when starting the first round, the pre-opening process for the big winning opening is also a process for starting the big hit game. In addition, since the value specifying the round is set in the EXT data for each round and the command for opening a special prize opening is specified, a different command for opening a special prize opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening opening designation command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Is a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) for designating round 10.

  Large winning opening opening process (step S306): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the special prize opening opening process, a process for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the special prize opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. In addition, control is performed to transmit the designation command after the big hit release to the microcomputer 100 for effect control, and when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end process (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Also, a process for setting a flag indicating a gaming state (for example, a high probability flag or a high base flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit release pre-processing (step S308): This process is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the pre-opening process for small hits, control is performed to open the big prize opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening) is initialized and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the big prize opening. Also, the execution time of the special prize opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value corresponding to step S309 (9 in this example). Note that the pre-opening process for small hits is executed every time the big winning opening during the small hit game is opened. It is also a process to start.

  Small hit release processing (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Processing to confirm the establishment of the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. When the closing condition of the big prize opening is satisfied and the number of opening of the big prize opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end process (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the microcomputer 100 for effect control to perform display control for notifying the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in step S312. In the start port switch passing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the first start port switch 13a is in an ON state (step S1211). If the first start port switch 13a is not in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S1222. If the first start port switch 13a is on, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the first reserved memory number has reached the upper limit (specifically, the first reserved memory for counting the first reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4) is checked (step S1212). If the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the process proceeds to step S1222.

  If the first reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1213), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1214). Further, the CPU 56 corresponds to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) for storing the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14. Data indicating “first” is set in the area (step S1215).

  In this embodiment, when the first start opening switch 13a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the first start winning opening 13), data indicating “first” is set, When the second start port switch 14a is turned on (that is, when a game ball starts and wins the second start winning port 14), data indicating “second” is set. For example, the CPU 56 sets 01 (H) as data indicating “first” when the first start port switch 13 a is turned on in the reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area), and the first 2 When the start port switch 14a is turned on, 02 (H) is set as data indicating “second”. In this case, when there is no corresponding reserved storage, 00 (H) is set in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area).

  FIG. 20A is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a reserved storage specifying information storage area (holding specified area). As shown in FIG. 20A, an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the value of the total reserved memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area. FIG. 20A shows an example in which the value of the total pending storage number counter is 5. As shown in FIG. 20 (A), an area corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending memory number counter is secured in the reserved specific area, and the first start winning opening 13 or the first 2. Data indicating “first” or “second” is set in the order of winning based on winning in the starting winning port 14. Accordingly, in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area), the winning order to the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is stored. Note that the reserved specific area is formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1216). In the process of step S1216, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the first special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 20B is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (hold buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the hold memory. As shown in FIG. 20B, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value of the second reserved storage number (4 in this example) is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, the first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer include a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation A random number for pattern type determination (random 2) and a random number for variation pattern determination (random 3) are stored. The first reserved storage buffer and the second reserved storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes prize-winning effect processing in which the fluctuation display result and the fluctuation pattern type when the fluctuation based on the detected start winning is subsequently executed are determined in advance at the time of starting winning (step S1217). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1218), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219). In addition, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the first start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1220), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1221).

  Note that by executing the processing of steps S1218 and S1219, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designating command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the first winning prize opening 13 is won.

  In this embodiment, when the start winning to the first start winning opening 13 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1218 to S1221, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the first start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the second start port switch 14a is in an on state (step S1222). If the second start port switch 14a is not in the ON state, the process is terminated as it is. If the second start port switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second reserved memory for counting the second reserved memory number). Whether or not the value of the number counter is 4 is confirmed (step S1223). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value, the processing is terminated as it is.

  If the second reserved memory number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1 (step S1224), and the value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total reserved memory number Is increased by 1 (step S1225). In addition, the CPU 56 sets data indicating “second” in an area corresponding to the value of the total reserved memory number counter in the reserved storage specific information storage area (hold specific area) (step S1226).

  Next, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 20B) (see FIG. 20B). Step S1227). Note that in the process of step S1227, a random R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern A random number for determination (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for random pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the start-port switch passing process (at the time of start winning), but is extracted at the start of the variation of the second special symbol. May be. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a variation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect processing (step S1228). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect processing (step S1229), and transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1230). Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the second start winning designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1231), and sets the value of the total pending storage number counter to the EXT data and sets the total pending storage number designation command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S1232).

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps S1229 and S1230, the CPU 56 regardless of the gaming state (whether it is a high probability state, a high base state, or a big hit gaming state). Always sends both the symbol designation command and the variable category command to the production control microcomputer 100 every time the second start winning opening 14 is won.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 occurs by executing the processing of steps S1229 to S1232, the symbol designation command, the variable category command, the second start prize designation A set of four commands, that is, a command and a total pending storage number designation command, are transmitted all at once in one timer interrupt.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217 and S1228. In the winning effect process, the CPU 56 first compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the normal jackpot determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the variation of the special symbol and the production symbol, whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal processing described later, determining the type of big hit or changing the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting processing In addition to that, at the timing when the game ball starts and wins at the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the change display based on the start winning is started, By executing the winning presentation process, it is confirmed in advance whether or not the big hit or the small win is made, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type or the variation pattern type determination random number is.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the normal jackpot determination value (N in step S220), the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability state (probability change state. High probability / high base state and high probability / It is confirmed whether or not a high probability flag indicating that the low base state is included is set (step S221). If the high probability flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 with the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S222). It should be noted that there is a possibility that a plurality of variation displays will be executed after confirming whether or not the state is surely changed in step S221 at the time of the start winning, until the actual display of the variation based on the start winning is actually started. There is. For this reason, the game state has changed (for example, the start of change) from when it is confirmed whether or not it is in the probable variation state at step S221 at the time of starting winning, until when the fluctuation display based on the starting winning is actually started. If there is a 15R probability variation big hit before, an 8R probability variation big hit, or a sudden probability variation big hit, the normal state changes to the probability variation state. For this reason, the gaming state determined in step S221 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) are not necessarily the same. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability change (N in step S222), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 and FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hit determination values to confirm whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the small hit determination table (first) shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol. Further, when there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets EXT data “00 (H)” indicating “out of” in the symbol designation command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process for determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is a high probability state and a high base state (specifically, the high probability flag and the high base flag are set in step S225). Whether or not). In addition, after confirming whether or not the high probability state and the high base state are set in step S225 at the time of starting winning, until the display of fluctuation based on the starting winning is actually started, Multiple variable displays may be performed. Therefore, the game state after the start winning is confirmed in step S225 whether or not it is in the high probability state and the high base state until the actual display of variation based on the start winning is actually started. (For example, when a 15R probability change big hit, an 8R probability change big hit, or a sudden probability change big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, there is a case where the normal state changes to the probability changed state). Therefore, the gaming state determined in step S225 at the time of starting winning and the gaming state determined at the start of variation (see step S61 described later) do not necessarily match. In order to prevent such a discrepancy, a game with a change in the game state in the currently stored hold memory is specified, and the determination at the start winning prize is made based on the game state after the change. Also good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for detachment according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold determination program for performing threshold determination in advance is incorporated, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type falls within any determination value range. Is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 219. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Is determined to set “08 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that “09 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 79. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “0A (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “0B (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  For example, if the CPU 56 determines that the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or less than the threshold value 79 (that is, 1 to 79). Is determined to set “00 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 89 or less (that is, 80 to 89), it is determined that “01 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 99 or less (ie, 90 to 99), it is determined that “02 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined that “03 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined that “04 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 214 or less (ie, 200 to 214), it is determined that “05 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 229 or less (that is, when it is 215 to 229), it is determined that “06 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 229 (that is, 230 to 251), it is determined that “07 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the threshold determination example described above, 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 are determined in order from the smallest threshold value. It will never fall within the range below the previous order threshold. That is, after determining whether or not the threshold value is 79 or less, when determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, it does not fall within the range of 1 to 79 that is equal to or less than the threshold value in the previous order. It is determined whether it is in the range. In this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 79, 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. Conversely, 229, 214, You may determine with 199, 169, 99, 89, and 79. The same applies to the determination using other threshold values shown below.

  Note that the threshold value in the normal state (low probability / low base state) may always be set without determining the gaming state in step S225. Even in such a configuration, the range of determination values is shared by at least the variation pattern type that is “non-reach” and the variation pattern type that is “super-reach”. It is possible to determine whether or not “out of” or “super reach out”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y of step S223), the CPU 56 uses the EXT data “05 (H)” indicating “small hit” as a symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 251 and determines in step S232 described later that the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is equal to or less than the threshold value 251 (1 to 251). It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the jackpot determination random number (random R) matches the jackpot determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot based on the jackpot type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning at the first start winning opening 13 (when the winning effect processing in step S1217 is executed), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first 1D) shown in FIG. Using special symbol 131a, it is determined whether the big hit type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit” or “sudden probability variation big hit”. When there is a start winning at the second start winning opening 14 (when the winning effect processing at step S1228 is executed), the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit”.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result of the jackpot type in the symbol designation command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that “15R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “01 (H)” indicating “15R probability variation big hit” to the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “8R probability variation big hit” is reached, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “02 (H)” indicating “8R probability variation big hit” in the symbol designation command. If it is determined that “suddenly probable big hit”, the CPU 56 performs processing for setting EXT data “04 (H)” indicating “suddenly probable big hit” in the symbol designation command.

  And CPU56 sets each threshold value for jackpots according to the jackpot type determined by step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the thresholds 74 and 149 when determining that “8R probability variation big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Is determined to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined that “11 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not less than or equal to the threshold value 149 (ie, 150 to 251), it is determined that “12 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines “15R probability variation big hit”, the threshold values 38 and 79 are set. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 in step S232 described later, and if it is equal to or smaller than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Is determined to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined that “15 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Further, for example, if the CPU 56 determines “suddenly promising big hit”, it sets the threshold 100. In this case, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 in step S232 described later, and if it is less than or equal to the threshold value 100 (that is, 1 to 100). Is determined to set “16 (H)” as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is not less than 100 (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined that “17 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variable category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold value set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the random number for variation pattern type determination (random 2) extracted in steps S1216 and S1227 to determine which value of the random number for variation pattern type determination. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, a variation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set. In step S232, the set variation pattern type is set. A determination table may be used to determine the range of the variation pattern type determination random number and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the determination result to the variable category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines “00 (H)” to “0B (H)”, “10” as shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) ”to“ 18 (H) ”is set to the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In this embodiment, although the case where it is determined that the big win or the small win is determined in the determination at the time of winning, the range in which the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type is uniformly determined is shown. When it is determined that the game is a big hit or a small hit, the range of the random number for determining the variation pattern type may not be determined. Then, when a big win or a small win is received, a symbol designating command indicating that the determination at the time of winning is made may be transmitted, and a variation category command comprehensively indicating that the variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit may be transmitted. . Then, for example, the production control microcomputer 100 does not show which variation pattern type is specifically shown, but the variation shown to be one of the big hit variation pattern types. A hold display may be displayed based on the reception of the category command.

  22 and 23 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has not yet been transmitted, control is performed to send the customer waiting demonstration designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is performed. finish. For example, when the CPU 56 transmits a customer waiting demonstration designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demonstration designation command has been transmitted. When the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interruption is executed after sending the customer waiting demo designation command, the customer waiting demonstration request command is repeatedly set based on the fact that the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completed flag is set. Control should be performed so that the demo designation command is not transmitted. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmission completion flag may be reset when the next special symbol variation display is started.

  In step S51, the CPU 56 does not check the value of the total reserved memory number, but checks whether or not data is set in the first area of the reserved specific area. If it is not set, it may be determined that there is no reserved storage, and the process may proceed to step S51A.

  If the total number of pending storage is not 0, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the first data among the data set in the pending specific area (see FIG. 20A) is “first” data. (Step S52). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating “first” (that is, data indicating “second”) (N in step S52), the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol pointer (first Data indicating “second” is set in a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for one special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol (step S53). When the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating “first” (Y in step S52), the CPU 56 sets data indicating “first” in the special symbol pointer (step S54). ).

  By executing the processing of steps S52 to S54, in this embodiment, the first special symbol changes in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls win the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Display or variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this embodiment, the first special symbol variation display or the second special symbol variation display is executed in accordance with the start winning order in which the game balls have won the first start winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. Although the case where it is displayed is shown, you may comprise so that a variable display of any one of a 1st special symbol and a 2nd special symbol may be performed preferentially. In this case, for example, when the state is shifted to the high base state, it is easy to start winning at the second starting winning port 14 provided with the variable winning ball device 15 and the second reserved memory is easily accumulated. The special symbol variation display may be executed with priority.

  In the case where the display is performed with priority on the variation display of the second special symbol, the jackpot determination random number (random R) is set to the jackpot determination in the low probability state in the winning effect processing shown in FIG. Only the process of comparing with the value may be executed and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the high probability state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is executed, and the processes of steps S221 and S222 are performed) You may not do it). With such a configuration, when the display of the variation of the second special symbol is prioritized and executed, between the determination result of the jackpot in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the jackpot at the actual start of variation It is possible to prevent the deviation from occurring.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 55 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 determines each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Store in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and in the reserved specific area and the first reserved memory buffer. Shift the contents of each storage area. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the reserved specific area and the second reserved memory buffer are shifted. To do.

  That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 stores the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n−1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 55. The random value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n−1. In addition, the CPU 56 adds the values (values indicating “first” or “second”) stored in the storage area corresponding to the total reserved storage number = m (m = 2 to 8) in the reserved specific area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved storage = m−1.

  Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or (Second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 in order. Further, the order in which the values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the total number of pending storages are extracted always matches the order of the total number of pending storages = 1-8.

  Then, the CPU 56 decreases the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Moreover, CPU56 performs control which transmits a background designation | designated command to the microcomputer 100 for effect control according to the present game state (step S60). In this case, when the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set and the high base flag indicating the high base state is set, the CPU 56 sets the high probability high base state background. Controls sending specified commands. Further, when only the high probability flag is set and the high base flag is not set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a high probability low base state background designation command. Further, when neither the high probability flag nor the high base flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a normal state background designation command.

  Specifically, when the CPU 56 transmits an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command (preliminarily set for each command in the ROM) is given. Set to pointer. And the address of the command transmission table according to an effect control command is set to a pointer, and an effect control command is transmitted in an effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the change of the special symbol is started, the background control command, the change pattern command, the display result specifying command, and the total pending storage number subtraction specifying command are sequentially set for each timer interrupt. It is transmitted to the computer 100. Specifically, when the change of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms elapses, the display result designation command is transmitted after elapse of 4 ms, and further after 4 ms elapses. A command for specifying the total pending storage number subtraction is transmitted. In addition, the symbol variation designation command (the first symbol variation designation command, the second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted when the special symbol variation starts, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the production control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, data indicating “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first start winning opening 13, that is, “first” indicating that the process is executed for the first special symbol. ”Or“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second special symbol, that is,“ second ”indicating that the process is performed on the second start winning opening 14. Data is set in the special symbol pointer. In the subsequent processing in the special symbol process, processing corresponding to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the process of steps S300 to S310 can be made common between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (a jackpot determination random number) from the random number buffer area and executes a jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 reads the jackpot determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start-port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer or the second hold storage buffer, and performs the jackpot determination. The big hit determination module compares the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (see FIG. 8) determined in advance with the big hit determination random number, and if they match, executes the process of determining the big hit or the small hit It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes a big hit determination or a small hit determination process.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is a probable change state (high probability / high base state, high probability / low base state), the probability that the game state is a big hit than when the gaming state is non-probability change state (normal state) Is configured to be high. Specifically, a jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the right side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance and the number of jackpot determination values are definitely changed. A normal big hit determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) set smaller than the hour big hit determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the gaming state is a probability variation state. If the gaming state is a probability variation state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the probability variation jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the big hit determination process is performed using the normal big hit determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8A, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. Note that deciding whether to win or not is to decide whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but to decide whether or not to stop the special symbol display as a big hit symbol. But there is.

  Note that whether or not the current gaming state is a probable change state is determined by whether or not the high probability flag is set. The high probability flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability change big hit”, “8R probability change big hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches one of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. ) To determine whether or not to make a small hit. If the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “second”, it is determined whether or not to make a small hit using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. . If it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the random R value does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step S75 as it is.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected as a table used to determine the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects a big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG.

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select the type corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1) for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer area (“15R probability variable big hit”, “ 8R probability change big hit "or" sudden probability change big hit ") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 reads out the jackpot type determination random number extracted in step S1216 or step S1227 of the start port switch passing process and stored in advance in the first hold memory buffer or the second hold memory buffer, and determines the jackpot type. Do. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the rate at which suddenly probable big hits are selected is high.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is “15R probability variable big hit”, “01” is set as data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is “8R probability variable big hit”, “02” is set as the data indicating the big hit type. When the jackpot type is “suddenly probable big hit”, “04” is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines a special symbol stop symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, “−” which is a loss symbol is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of “1”, “7”, and “9”, which is a big hit symbol, is determined as a special symbol stop symbol according to the determination result of the big hit type. That is, when the big hit type is determined to be “suddenly promising big hit”, “1” is decided as a special symbol stop symbol, and when “8R probable big hit” is decided, “7” is designated as a special symbol stop symbol. If “15R probability variation big hit” is determined, “9” is determined as a special symbol stop symbol. When the small hit flag is set, “5” as the small hit symbol is determined as the special symbol stop symbol.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is shown, but the method for determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is as follows. It is not limited to what is shown in the embodiment. For example, a table in which a special symbol stop symbol and a jackpot type are associated in advance is prepared, and when a special symbol stop symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the big hit type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. You may comprise so that a classification may also be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9A) as tables used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. ) To (C)) is selected (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D) as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. )) Is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S95). Note that the high base flag is set when the gaming state shifts to the probability changing state, and is reset when the high base state ends. Specifically, it is determined to be “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”, and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Further, after the big hit game is over, it is reset when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (70 times in this embodiment).

  If the high base flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S96). If the high probability flag is not set (N in Step S96), that is, if the gaming state is the normal state, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total number of pending storage is 3 or more (Step S97). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table 135A for detachment as a table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. 10A) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S97), the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern type determination table for deviation as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S96), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / low base state, the CPU 56 determines the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types. As a table used for this purpose, the deviation variation pattern type determination table 135D (see FIG. 10D) is selected (step S100). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  If the high base flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, if the gaming state is a high probability / high base state (in this embodiment, the low probability / high base state is controlled). Therefore, if the high base flag is set, a high probability / high base state is established), and the CPU 56 uses the variation for outlier as a table used to determine one of a plurality of variation patterns. The pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S101). Then, the process proceeds to step S102.

  In this embodiment, when the processing of steps S95 to S101 is executed, and the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation for loss shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, the variation pattern type determination table 135C for loss shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, non-reach CA2-3 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S102, which will be described later. If the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-3 is determined, the process changes in step S105. Short reach variation non-reach PA1-2 is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is a high probability / high base state, or when the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, a change display of the shortening variation may be performed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation (see FIG. 10C) used in the high probability / high base state and the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation based on the number of reserved storage ( Although the table is different from that shown in FIG. 10B, a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  In this embodiment, even when the gaming state is a high base state, when the total number of pending storage is almost 0 (for example, 0, 0 or 1), The change display of the shortening change may not be performed. In this case, for example, when the CPU 56 determines Y in step S95, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the total pending storage number is substantially zero. The determination table 135A (see FIG. 10A) may be selected.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads random 2 (random number for variation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (the first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and performs the processing of steps S92, S94, S98, S99, S100, or S101. By referring to the selected table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S102).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11) as tables used to determine the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S102. ), One of the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S103). Further, the random pattern 3 (random number for variation pattern determination) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), and the variation pattern is determined by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in step S103. Is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S105). When the random number 3 (variation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the start winning timing, the CPU 56 uses the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to extract the value directly from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a first symbol variation designation command. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit an effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S107).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern in the variation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S108). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S109).

  In the case where it is determined to be out of place, instead of suddenly determining the variation pattern type, first, it may be determined whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a random number for reach determination. Then, based on the determination result as to whether or not to reach, the processing of steps S95 to S102 may be executed to determine the variation pattern type. In this case, the variation pattern type determination table for non-reach (including the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-3 shown in FIG. 10) and the variation pattern type determination table for reach (FIG. 10). Normal CA2-4 to normal CA2-6, including a variation pattern type of super CA2-7) are prepared, and one of the variation pattern type determination tables is selected based on the reach determination result. The variation pattern type may be determined.

  In addition, when determining whether or not to reach by a lottery process using a reach determination random number, depending on the total reserved memory number (which may be the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number), Reach determination tables having different selection ratios may be selected, and it may be determined whether or not to reach so that the reach probability decreases as the number of reserved memories increases. In this case, for example, whether the CPU 56 matches the determination value assigned to the common range of the reach determination table in determining whether “super-reach out” or “non-reach out” occurs in the winning effect processing. By determining whether or not, it may be determined in advance whether or not to reach. In addition, considering that the execution ratio of the notice effect is reduced, as shown in this embodiment, the “super-reach out” is performed depending on the variation pattern type without performing the lottery process using the random number for reach determination. It is preferable that a display of a hold display is performed by determining in advance whether or not “non-reach” will occur.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits one of the presentation control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 6 designation) (see FIG. 13) in accordance with the determined big hit type, small hit, and loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S118. When the big hit flag is set, according to the type of big hit, control is performed to transmit a display result 2 designation command when it is “15R probability variation big hit”, and when it is “8R probability variation big hit”, display result 3 Control to transmit the specified command is performed (step S112). Whether or not it is “15R probability variation big hit” is specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”. Specifically, whether or not it is “8R probability variation big hit” is determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “02”. it can. In addition, when it is not the probability variation big hit, that is, when it is sudden probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S118). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 6 designation command (step S119). When the small hit flag is not set (N in Step S118), that is, when it is out of place, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a display result 1 designation command (Step S120).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S121).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first checks whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S1121). Whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command when transmitting the total pending storage number subtraction designation command in step S1122 described later. It is sufficient to set whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set, and whether or not the total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set in step S1121. Further, in this case, the set total pending storage number subtraction designation command transmission completion flag is reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot end processing, which will be described later, when the special symbol variation display is ended or when the big jackpot is ended. do it.

  Next, if the total pending storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the total pending storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122).

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125). When the variable time timer times out (step S1126), the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag indicating the high probability state and the high base flag indicating the high base state if set (step S132). ), Control for transmitting a jackpot start designation command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation jackpot” or “8R probability variation jackpot”, a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. When the big hit type is sudden probability change big hit, a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the type of jackpot is “15R probability variation big hit”, “8R probability variation big hit”, or “sudden probability variation big hit” is data indicating the big hit type stored in the RAM 55 (stored in the big hit type buffer). Data).

  In addition, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) is set in the big hit display time timer (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening in the winning prize opening number counter (for example, 15 times for “15R-probable big hit”, 8 times for “8R-probable big hit”, 2 times for “suddenly promising big hit”). ) Is set (step S135). The round time per round in the big hit game is also set. In the case of sudden probability variation big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 seconds, and in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the pre-winner opening pre-processing (step S305) (step S136).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the high probability flag indicating the high probability state is set (step S137). When the high probability flag is set (that is, when the probability variation state (high probability / high base state or high probability / low base state)), the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high probability state is indicated. The value of the high probability count counter is decremented by 1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the high probability count counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the high probability flag (step S140). If the high probability flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S141.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the high base flag indicating the high base state is set (step S141). When the high base flag is set (that is, in the case of a high probability / high base state), the value of the high base number counter indicating the number of times the special symbol can be changed in the high base state is decremented by 1 ( Step S142). Then, when the value of the high base number counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S143), the CPU 56 resets the high base flag (step S144). Then, the process proceeds to step S145. If the high base flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S145 as it is.

  Next, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S145). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 transmits a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S146). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time when the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S147). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 2 times) is set in the special winning opening opening number counter (step S148). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S308) (step S149).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S145), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S150).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160). If the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S161), and control for transmitting a jackpot end designation command is performed (step S162). Here, in the case of 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, a big hit end designation command is transmitted, and in the case of sudden probability variation big hit, a small hit / sudden probability sudden variation big hit end designation command is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set in the big hit end display timer (step S163), and the processing is ended.

  In step S164, 1 is subtracted from the value of the big hit end display timer (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether the big hit type is a 15R probability variable big hit or an 8R probability variable big hit (step S166). Whether or not it is a 15R probability variation big hit, an 8R probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, specifically, the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is “01”, “02” or It can be determined by checking whether it is “04” or not. If it is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time reduction flag to shift the gaming state to the time reduction state (step S167) and sets 70 to the high base number counter (step S168). Further, the high probability flag is set to shift the gaming state to the probability change state (step S169), and 70 is set to the high probability count counter (step S170). Then, the process proceeds to step S171. If neither the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit is obtained (that is, if the sudden probability variation big hit), the CPU 56 proceeds to step S169.

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) as effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. The effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process when the power is turned on. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation control activation interval (for example, 4 ms) is performed (step S701). . Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the effect control process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and display control of the effect display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 performs the fourth symbol process (step S706). In the 4th symbol process, the process corresponding to the current control state (4th symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the 4th symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. The display control of the 4th symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number update process for updating a count value of a counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

  FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is configured by a 12-byte area of reception command buffers 1 to 12. A command reception number counter indicating in which area the received command is stored is used. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. The ring buffer format is not necessarily required.

  The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) the effect control command stored in the buffer area is. Note that the interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal is executed in preference to the timer interrupt process executed every 4 ms.

  31 and 32 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is incremented by +2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read at a time.

  If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, a variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 6 designation command) in the RAM. Is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618).

  If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 101 sets a confirmed command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) (step S621), the effect control CPU 101 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S622).

  If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) (step S623), the production control CPU 101 sets a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag. (Step S624).

  If the received effect control command is any symbol designating command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received symbol designating command as the first free winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S652).

  FIG. 33 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the command storage area at the start winning prize. As shown in FIG. 33, an area (storage areas 1 to 8) corresponding to the maximum value (8 in this example) of the total pending storage number is secured in the start winning command storage area. In this embodiment, as shown in steps S1218 to S1221 and S1229 to S1232 of the start port switch passing process of FIG. 19, when there is a start winning to the first start winning port 13 or the second start winning port 14 In addition, four commands of a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command (a first start prize designation command or a second start prize designation command), and a combined pending storage number designation command are set in one timer interrupt. Sent by. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 33, in each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, a start prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command can be stored in association with each other. Thus, a storage area is secured.

  In this embodiment, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 stores commands in the first storage area that is vacant in the start winning command storage area in the order received. In this embodiment, the command transmission is performed in the order of the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the total pending storage number designation command within one timer interruption. As shown in FIG. 33, the symbol designation command, the variation category command, the start winning designation command, and the combined pending storage number designation command are stored in the respective storage areas 1 to 8 in this order (in FIG. 33, An example in which commands are stored in the storage areas 1 to 5 is shown).

  In the example shown in FIG. 33, a total pending storage number designation command (7) that designates the total pending storage number 7 in the storage area in which up to seven pending memories have occurred in the previous fluctuation display and the latest command is stored. C207 (H)) is stored, and thereafter, the storage state of the command storage area at the time of the start winning prize is shown in the situation where one hold memory is consumed and the variable display based on the second hold memory is started. .

  In addition, each command stored in the start winning command storage area shown in FIG. 33 is displayed in step S663 to be described later every time the display of variation of the effect symbol is started (every time the total pending storage number subtraction designation command is received). It is deleted from what is stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start winning command storage area are shifted. For example, in the storage state shown in FIG. 33, when a new effect symbol variation display is started, each command stored in the storage area 1 is deleted and each command stored in the storage area 2 is stored. Each command stored in the storage area 3 is shifted to the storage area 2 and each command stored in the storage area 4 is shifted to the storage area 3 and stored in the storage area 5. Each command is shifted to the storage area 4. It should be noted that the timing at which each command is deleted may be during the effect symbol variation start process, which will be described later, at the timing of starting the effect symbol variation display.

  In this embodiment, when a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a startup prize designation command, and a combined pending storage number designation command received when a starting prize is generated are comprehensively expressed, Say. Further, among the commands at the time of starting winning, a starting winning designation command and a combined pending storage number designation command which are commands for designating information capable of recognizing that the first reserved memory number or the second reserved memory number has increased, When expressed in a comprehensive manner, it is also called reserved storage information. Also, a symbol designating command which is a command indicating whether or not the big hit or the small win is determined in the winning presentation process at the time of starting winning (see FIG. 21), the determination result of the big hit type, the determination result of the variation pattern type, and When the variable category command is comprehensively expressed, it is also referred to as a winning determination result designation command or determination result information.

  In this embodiment, each of the storage areas 1 to 8 of the start winning command storage area includes data indicating a change pattern of the display mode of the hold display and the active display (hereinafter referred to as “hold change pattern”), A storage area is secured so that data indicating the change timing of the display mode can be stored. As for the pending change pattern, P01 does not change from “white”, P02 changes from “white” to “red”, P03 does not change from “red”, changes from “white” to “red”, and further changes to “gold”. P04 that changes and P05 that changes from “red” to “gold” are provided (see FIG. 39A). In addition, as the change timing, “n-th” which is a timing shifted to the n-th (n = 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7) hold display and the display of the active display is started. There are provided “at the start of active” which is a timing and “being active” which is a timing after a predetermined period (13 seconds) has elapsed since the start of active display (see FIG. 40). Note that although active is determined as the change timing, when the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, the display mode of the active display changes 1 second before the change stops. The pending change pattern and the change timing are determined and stored at the time of starting winning. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 33, P01 is determined as the hold change pattern of the first to fourth hold memories, and P04 is determined as the hold change pattern of the fifth hold memory. It is shown that “fourth” and “active” have been determined as the change timing of the pending storage.

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S653), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area 1 of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Are stored in the storage area in which the latest symbol designating command is stored (step S654A). Then, a variable category command reception flag indicating that the variable category command has been received is set (step S654B).

  If the received effect control command is the first start prize designation command (step S655), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received first start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variation category command are stored in the storage area (step S656B).

  If the received effect control command is the second start prize designation command (step S657), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second start prize designation command in each start prize command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designating command and variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S658B).

  If the received production control command is a combined pending storage number designation command (step S659), the production control CPU 101 uses the received aggregate pending storage number designation command for each start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Of the storage areas 1 to 8, the latest symbol designation command, variation category command, and start winning designation command are stored in the storage area (step S660).

  If the received effect control command is a total pending storage number subtraction designation command (step S661), the effect control CPU 101 erases the first on-hold display in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c and sets the remaining on-hold display to 1. Shifting is performed one by one, and the total pending storage number display in the total pending storage display unit 18c is updated (step S662). For example, when the first to fifth hold displays of the combined hold storage display section 18c are lit up, the first hold display is deleted when the total hold storage number subtraction designation command is received. At the same time, the second hold display is shifted to the first display area, the third hold display is shifted to the second display area, and the fourth display is displayed. The held display that has been displayed is shifted to the third display area, and the held display that has been displayed fifth is shifted to the fourth display area.

  At this time, if there is a hold display that has reached the change timing, the display mode is changed according to the hold change pattern. Specifically, the first is stored as the change timing of the storage area 2, the second is stored as the change timing of the storage area 3, or the third is stored as the change timing of the storage area 4. Whether the fourth is stored as the change timing of the storage area 5, is the fifth stored as the change timing of the storage area 6, or is the sixth stored as the change timing of the storage area 7? When the seventh is stored as the change timing of the storage area 8, the display mode of the corresponding hold display is changed according to the hold change pattern. For example, when the next change is started from the time illustrated in FIG. 33 and the process of step S662 is performed, the fourth and active are stored as the change timing of the storage area 5, and P04 is stored as the pending change pattern. Therefore, the display mode is changed from “white” to “red” when the fifth hold display is shifted to the fourth display area.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts display of active display (step S662a). For example, if the hold display displayed in the first display area is the hold display of the effect mode display mode, the display of the active display is started in the same effect mode display mode. In addition, if the hold display displayed in the first display area is not the hold display in the production mode display mode, the active change start time is stored as the change timing of the storage area 1, and the hold change pattern is displayed. In the corresponding display mode (“red” if the pending change pattern is P02 or P04 and before the first change, “gold” if P04 is after the first change or P05) When the display is started and the active start time is not stored as the change timing of the storage area 1, the display mode is the same as the hold display displayed in the first display area of the combined hold storage display unit 18c. To start the active display.

  Further, the production control CPU 101 moves the data in the storage area 1 in the start winning command storage area to the active information storage area (not shown) formed in the RAM (step S663A), and the data in the storage areas 2 to 8 Are respectively stored in the storage areas 2 to 7 (step S663). The active information storage area is the same type of information as the start winning command storage area (design designation command, variation category command, start prize designation command, combined pending memory number designation command, pending change pattern, change timing 1, change timing 2) Can be stored as information corresponding to the active display.

  If the received effect control command is another command, effect control CPU 101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S684). Then, control goes to a step S611.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the effect control process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first determines whether or not a new start winning command is received (step S800A), and if received, special zone control that performs control related to the special zone effect. Processing (step S800B) and hold display control processing (step S800C) for performing control related to hold display are executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S810 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the effect control process, the display state of the effect display device 9 is controlled and variable display of the effect symbol is realized. However, control related to variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process. It should be noted that the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the first special symbol and the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the variation of the second special symbol may be executed by separate effect control process processing. Good. Further, in this case, it may be determined which special symbol variation display is being executed depending on which representation control process processing is performing the variation display of the representation symbol.

  Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether or not a variation pattern command has been received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the change pattern command has been received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): Control is performed so that the variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802).

  Production symbol variation processing (step S802): Controls the switching timing of each variation state (variation speed) constituting the variation pattern and monitors the end of the variation time. When the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803).

  Effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804), and the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). .

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round processing (step S805).

  In-round processing (step S805): Display control during round is performed. If the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. When the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end effect processing (step S807): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Small hit display process (step S808): After the end of the variation time, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the effect display device 9 of the occurrence of the small hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (step S809).

  Small hit opening process (step S809): A process for confirming the closing condition of the big prize opening is performed. If the closing condition for the big prize opening is satisfied and there is still a remaining opening, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit display process (step S808). Further, when all the openings are finished, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit end effect process (step S810).

  Small hit end effect processing (step S810): In the effect display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special zone control process. In the special zone control process, the effect control CPU 101 has set a special zone flag indicating that the special zone effect is being executed or a rush waiting flag indicating that the special zone effect is waiting to be started. Is determined (steps S3501 and S3502), and if any of them is set, the special zone control process is terminated as it is. Thereby, it is prevented that the special zone effect which makes a some change notice object be performed repeatedly.

  When neither the special zone flag nor the rush waiting flag is set, the production control CPU 101 determines whether or not the rush failure waiting flag indicating that the rush failure production is waiting is set. (Step S3503) If it is set, the special zone control process is terminated as it is.

  When the rush failure waiting flag is not set, the presentation control CPU 101 determines whether or not all the stored memories stored previously are the stored memories corresponding to the non-reach deviation (step S3504). Specifically, if the variable category 1 designation command, the variation category 9 designation command or the variation category 11 designation command is stored in all the storage areas before the storage area corresponding to the newly stored pending storage, It is determined that all previously stored pending memories are pending memories corresponding to non-reach misses.

  If all previously stored memories are reserved memories corresponding to non-reach outages, a special for determining whether or not to execute a special zone effect with the newly generated reserved memory as the subject of advance notice. A zone entry lottery process is executed (step S3505). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the special zone effect using the special zone entry lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36A is an explanatory diagram showing a special zone entry lottery table. The special zone entry lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (A) is assigned a judgment value corresponding to whether or not the special zone effect is executed according to the winning judgment result (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach out, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 36A, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for special zone entry lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (when symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), executing special zone effect at a rate of 60% is 40% It is decided not to execute the special zone effect at the rate of.

  Also, for example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), the special zone effect is executed at a rate of 30%. It is determined that the special zone effect is not executed at a rate of 70%.

  Further, for example, when the determination result at the time of winning is other, it is determined not to execute the special zone effect at a rate of 100%. That is, the special zone effect can be executed only when 15R probability variable big hit, 8R probability variable big hit or super reach is off, but this is not restrictive. Or it is good also as being able to perform special zone production even if it is non-reach.

  When execution of the special zone effect (entering into the special zone) is determined (Y in step S3506), the effect control CPU 101 sets a rush waiting flag (step S3507) and the number of executions of the special zone effect. An execution frequency determination lottery is performed for determining (step S3508). Specifically, the number of executions of the special zone effect is determined using the execution number determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36B is an explanatory diagram showing an execution frequency determination lottery table. In the number-of-executions determination lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (B), the number of executions of special zone effects according to the winning determination result (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach off, etc.) Although the determination value corresponding to K is assigned, in the example shown in FIG. 36B, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the number of execution times, and determines a determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  As shown in the figure, when the execution count K is “1”, the active display for the change of the notice target is displayed (specifically, after 5 seconds from the start of the active display). At the same time, the execution of the special zone effect is started. When the number of executions K is “2”, special when the hold display for the subject change is the first hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the first hold display) Execution of zone production is started. When the number of executions K is “3”, it is special when the hold display for the subject change is the second hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the second hold display) Execution of zone production is started. When the number of executions K is “4”, special when the hold display for the subject change is the third hold display (specifically, 5 seconds after the third hold display) Execution of zone production is started. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number of executions K is “4”, but a value of “5” or more may be selected as the number of executions K.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is 1, “1” is determined as the execution count K at a rate of 100% regardless of the winning determination result.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is 2, and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 40%. “1” is determined as the number of executions K at a rate of 60% and “2”. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command, or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “1” is 40 at a rate of 60%. “2” is determined as the number of executions K at the rate of%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is 3, and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 20%. “1” is determined as the number of executions K, “2” at a rate of 30%, and “3” at a rate of 50%. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “1” is 30 at a rate of 50%. The number of executions K is determined as “2” at the rate of% and “3” at the rate of 20%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is 4 or more and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), a ratio of 10% Thus, “1” is determined as the number of executions K, “2” at a rate of 20%, “3” at a rate of 30%, and “4” at a rate of 40%. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “1” is 30 at a rate of 40%. The number of executions K is determined as “2” at the rate of%, “3” at the rate of 20%, and “4” at the rate of 10%.

  Thereby, in this Embodiment, the reliability with respect to becoming 15R probability variation big hit and 8R probability variation big hit becomes high, so that the frequency | count K of execution is large.

  The effect control CPU 101 sets the lottery result as the number of executions K (step S3509), and sets the total number of pending storages in the remaining number of times R that is the number of remaining fluctuations until the special zone effect is notified (step S3510). The remaining number of times R is decremented by 1 each time the change is executed (see steps S4602 and S4610), and the successful entry effect is executed in the change in which the value obtained by adding 1 to the remaining number of times R and the execution number K are equal. At the same time, the special zone effect is started (see Y and S4605 in step S4603), and the special zone effect is ended when the remaining number of times R becomes “0” (Y and S4611 in step S4606). See Y).

  In addition, when it is determined not to execute the special zone effect (not to enter the special zone) (N in step S3506), it is determined whether or not to execute the entry failure effect with the new reserved memory as a notice target. A rush failure production execution lottery is performed (step S3511). Specifically, whether or not to execute the entry failure effect is determined using the entry failure effect execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36C is an explanatory diagram showing a rush failure production execution lottery table. In the rush failure production execution lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (C), a determination value corresponding to whether or not the special zone production is executed is determined according to the determination result at the time of winning (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach out, etc.). In the example shown in FIG. 36C, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for the sake of simplicity. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the rush failure effect execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), executing a special zone effect at a rate of 20% is 80% It is decided not to execute the special zone effect at the rate of.

  Also, for example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), the special zone effect is executed at a rate of 10%. It is determined that the special zone effect is not executed at a rate of 90%.

  Further, for example, when the determination result at the time of winning is other, it is determined that the special zone effect is executed at a rate of 1% and the special zone effect is not executed at a rate of 99%.

  When the entry failure effect is executed (Y in step S3512), an execution timing determination lottery for determining the execution timing of the entry failure effect is performed (step S3513). Specifically, the execution timing of the entry failure effect is determined using the execution timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 36D is an explanatory diagram showing an execution timing determination lottery table. In the execution timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 36 (D), the execution timing of the entry failure effect is determined according to the determination result at the time of winning (15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, super reach out, etc.) for each total pending storage number. In the example shown in FIG. 36D, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for execution timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  As shown in the figure, each execution timing is associated with a specific timing number for specifying the execution timing. For example, the timing specific number “0” is set to “active” at the timing when the active display for the change of the notice target is displayed, and “1” is set at the timing when the hold display for the change of the notice target is the first hold display. Timing specific number “1” for the “second”, timing specific number “2” for the timing of the “second” at which the hold display for the change in the notification target is the second hold display The specific timing number “3” is associated with the “third” of the timing at which the hold display for the fluctuation is the third hold display.

  In this embodiment, since a value of 1 to 4 can be selected as the number K of executions of the special zone effect (see FIG. 36B), there is a fourth or more hold display for the change in the notice target. Although the entry failure effect is not executed at the timing of the hold display, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a value of “5” or more can be selected as the execution count K, the entry failure effect can be executed even at the timing when the hold display with respect to the change in the notice target is the fourth or more hold display. It may be there.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is 1, “active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 100% regardless of the winning determination result.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is 2, and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 60%. “Active” is determined as the execution timing at a rate of 40%, “first”. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “active” is set at a rate of 40%, 60 The “first” is determined as the execution timing at the rate of%. If the determination result at the time of winning is other, “active” is determined as the execution timing at the rate of 20%, and “first” is determined at the rate of 80%.

  For example, if the total pending storage number is 3, and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 50%. “Active” is determined as an execution timing at a rate of 30%, “first” and at a rate of 20% “second”. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “active” is 30% at a rate of 30%. As the execution timing, “first” is determined at the rate of%, and “second” is determined at the rate of 50%. If the winning determination result is other, “active” is determined at a rate of 10%, “first” at a rate of 20%, and “second” at a rate of 70% is determined as an execution timing. Is done.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is 4, and the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (if a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received), the rate is 40%. “Active” is determined as an execution timing at a rate of 30% “first”, at a rate of 20% “second” and at a rate of 10% “third”. If the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), “active” is 20% at a rate of 20%. The execution timing is determined as “execution timing” of “1st” at the rate of%, “second” at the rate of 30%, and “third” at the rate of 40%. In addition, if the winning determination result is other than “active” at a rate of 5%, “first” at a rate of 10%, “second” at a rate of 15%, 70% The “third” is determined as the execution timing.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 sets a rush failure standby flag (step S3514), and associates the remaining standby number P that is the number of remaining fluctuations until the rush failure effect is executed with the execution timing determined in step 3513. A value obtained by subtracting the specified timing specific number from the total pending storage number is set (step S3515). The remaining waiting number P is decremented by 1 each time the change is executed (see step S4614), and the entry failure effect is executed when the change becomes “0” (Y in step S4615, S4616). reference).

  37 and 38 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining a hold change pattern of the hold display for the newly generated hold memory (step S3701). Specifically, the hold change pattern is determined using the hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 39A is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change pattern determination table. Each holding change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 39A is assigned a determination value corresponding to the holding change pattern according to the determination result at the time of winning (15R probability change big hit or 8R probability change big hit, super reach out, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 39A, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the pending change pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), P01 is at a rate of 10%, P02 is at a rate of 15%, P03 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 20%, P04 at a rate of 25%, and P05 at a rate of 30%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), P01 is a ratio of 70% and a ratio of 15% Thus, P02 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 7%, P03 at a rate of 5%, P04 at a rate of 3%, and P05 at a rate of 3%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is other, P01 is determined as a pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the hold change pattern at such a ratio, the display mode of hold display or active display with respect to 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability change big hit is white <red <gold.

  In addition, the pending change pattern in this embodiment is a pending change pattern that does not become “red” (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “no red”, for example, P01), and a pending change pattern that becomes “red” (hereinafter referred to as “red”). “There is red”, for example. Therefore, the selection ratio of red and non-red is shown in FIG.

  As shown in the drawing, when the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, red is selected at a rate of 90%, and no red is selected at a rate of 10%. When the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach, red is selected at a rate of 30% and no red is selected at a rate of 70%. If the winning determination result is other than 100%, red is selected at a rate of 100%.

  Here, when the selection ratio of execution of the special zone effect shown in FIG. 36 (A) is compared with the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 39 (B), the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation. If it is a big win, the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio for executing special zone production, but if the winning judgment result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red performs special zone production. It is lower than the rate to do. Therefore, when the presence of red is selected, the reliability with respect to the 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit is higher than when the execution of the special zone effect is selected. In other words, in this embodiment, the display of the hold display or the active display whose display mode is “red” is configured to have higher reliability than the special zone effect.

  In this embodiment, P02 to P05 can be selected only when the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit or super reach deviation, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, P02 to P05 may be selectable even if the determination result at the time of winning is a sudden probability change big hit, small hit, normal reach is off or non-reach is off.

  Next, the production control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the on-hold change pattern determined in step S3701 in the storage area (the storage area corresponding to the total on-hold storage number) in the start winning command storage area, thereby changing the hold. The pattern is stored (step S3702). When the stored change pattern is a change pattern without change (P01 or P03), the process proceeds to step S3710. When the stored change pattern is a change pattern with change (any one of P02, P04, and P05), a change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing is performed (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40A or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 40A is an explanatory diagram showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 40B is an explanatory diagram showing a second change timing determination lottery table. Each change timing determination lottery table shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B) is assigned a determination value corresponding to the change timing for each total pending storage number, but is shown in FIGS. 40 (A) and 40 (B). In the example, in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, random numbers for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is a big hit.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, “active” is determined at a rate of 60%, and active start time is determined at a rate of 40%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “2”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 50%, the active start time at a rate of 30%, and the first at a rate of 20% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “3”, it is active at a rate of 40%, active at a rate of 30%, the first at a rate of 20%, and 2 at a rate of 10% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “4”, the active status at 30%, the active start rate at 25%, the first at 20%, and 2 at 15% The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 10%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “5”, active at 22%, active start at 20%, first at 18%, and 2 at 16% The third eye is determined at a rate of 14%, and the fourth eye is determined at a rate of 10%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “6”, the active status is 22%, the active start rate is 18%, the first one is 16%, and the second is 14%. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the fourth at the rate of 10%, and the fifth at the rate of 8%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storage is “7”, the active status is 20%, the active start rate is 18%, the first one is 16%, and the second is 14%. The change timing is determined for the third eye at a rate of 12%, the fourth at a rate of 10%, the fifth at a rate of 6%, and the sixth at a rate of 4%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “8”, active at 20%, active start at 18%, first at 16%, 2 at 14% Eyes, 3% at 12%, 4th at 8%, 5th at 6%, 6th at 4%, 7 at 2% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  Next, the case where change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 40 (B) will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “1”, “active” is determined at a rate of 40%, and active start time is determined at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is “2”, the active timing is determined at a rate of 20%, the active start time at a rate of 30%, and the first one at a rate of 50% is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “3”, 10% is active, 20% is active start, 30% is the first, 40% is 2 The eye is determined as the change timing.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “4”, the active status is 10%, the active start rate is 15%, the first one is 20%, and the second is 25%. The third eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 30%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “5”, 10% is active, 14% is active start, 16% is the first, 18% is 2 The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 20% and the third at the rate of 22%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “6”, the active status is 8%, the active start rate is 10%, the first one is 12%, and the second is 14%. As the change timing, the third eye is determined at a rate of 16%, the fourth at a rate of 18%, and the fifth at a rate of 22%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “7”, the active rate is 4%, the active start rate is 6%, the first rate is 10%, and the second rate is 12%. As the change timing, the third eye is determined at a rate of 14%, the fourth at a rate of 16%, the fifth at a rate of 18%, and the sixth at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “8”, active at a rate of 2%, active start at a rate of 4%, first at a rate of 6%, and 2 at a rate of 8% Eyes at 12%, 3rd, 14% at 4th, 16% at 5th, 18% at 6th, 20% at 7% The eye is determined as the change timing.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is easier to determine the change timing when an earlier time from the start of the hold display in the case of a loss than in the case of a big hit. Therefore, as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the reliability with respect to the big hit is higher at a later time from the start of the hold display. On the contrary, the earlier the time from the start of the hold display, the higher the reliability for the big hit may be, and the change timing may not show the reliability for the big hit.

  In this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of winning is neither big hit nor super-reaching (in other cases), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern. The decision lottery table is not provided, but it is assumed that the other change timing decision lottery table is provided as long as it is configured to be able to select a pending change pattern whose display mode changes even in other cases. Also good.

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start winning command storage area (step S3705). If the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is a pending change pattern with two changes (that is, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707) and determined. If the changed timing is different from the timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). If the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), a change timing determination lottery (until a change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined) Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. Thus, two different change timings are determined. A plurality of combination patterns of two change timings are provided, and two change timings may be determined collectively by selecting one of them.

  Thereafter, the CPU 101 for effect control executes processing (steps S3710 to S3725) related to displaying the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode. Specifically, the process includes a first process (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying the hold display in the first special suggestion mode and a second process related to displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode. Process (steps S3714 to S3717), third process (steps S3718 to S3721) related to displaying the hold display in the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and fourth process (steps) related to displaying the hold display in the SP suggestion mode S3722 to S3725).

  Hereinafter, the hold display in the first special suggestion mode is “first special suggestion hold”, the hold display in the second special suggestion mode is “second special suggestion hold”, and the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is “pseudo continuous suggestion hold”. , The hold display in the SP suggestion mode is sometimes referred to as “SP suggestion hold”.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not a new reserved storage is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified (step S3710). For example, in the above-described special zone control process (see FIG. 35), when it is determined to enter the special zone (for example, immediately after Y in step S3506), the flag is set. For example, it is determined that the new reserved memory is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified.

  If the new hold memory is scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified, a first special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the first special suggestion hold (step S3711). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to execute the first special suggestion hold using the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41A is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (A), a determination value corresponding to whether or not the display of the first special suggestion hold is executed is assigned for each winning determination result and hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 41A, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, if the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or symbol 3 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, the first rate is 40%. It is determined that executing the display of the special suggestion hold does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 60%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 20%. The

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, 30% It is determined that executing the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate does not execute the display of the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 70%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 40%. The

  When it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold, the display of the first special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3713).

  If the new reserved memory is not scheduled to enter the special zone to be notified in step S3710, or if the display of the first special suggestion reserved is not executed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the new reserved memory has entered the subject of the advance notice. Execute the notice effect (if you plan to move to the special zone (if you plan to execute the rush success effect), or if you do not plan to move to the special zone but plan to execute the rush failure effect) Is included) (step S3714). For example, in the above-described special zone control process (see FIG. 35), when it is determined to enter the special zone (for example, immediately after Y in step S3506), the flag is set. In this case, it is determined that the new hold memory is scheduled to execute the rush success effect for the notice target. Further, for example, in the special zone control process (see FIG. 35) described above, when it is determined to execute the entry failure effect (for example, immediately after Y in step S3512), the flag is set. If so, it is determined that the new on-hold storage is scheduled to execute the entry failure effect for the advance notice.

  If the rush announcement effect is scheduled to be executed, a second special suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold (step S3715). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold using the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 40B, a rush success effect is executed as a determination value corresponding to whether or not the second special suggestion hold display is executed for each winning change determination result and hold change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 41B, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown to simplify the explanation, although different values are assigned depending on the case of performing the entry failure effect. Yes. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit (when a symbol 2 designation command or a symbol 3 designation command is received) will be described.

  For example, when the rush success presentation is scheduled (when the transition to the special zone is scheduled), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 40%. , It is determined not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 60%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 20%. The

  For example, when the rush failure effect is scheduled to be executed (when the schedule is not shifted to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 80%. , It is decided not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 20%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 60%. The

  Next, the case where the determination result at the time of winning is out of super reach (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received) will be described.

  For example, when the rush success effect is scheduled to be executed (when the plan is to shift to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 30%. , It is determined not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 70%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 40%. The

  For example, when the rush failure effect is scheduled to be executed (when the schedule is not shifted to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 60%. , It is determined not to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold at a rate of 40%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%. The

  Finally, a case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, when the entry failure production is scheduled to be executed (when it is not planned to shift to the special zone), the display of the second special suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 100% in any hold change pattern. Is determined. In this embodiment, when the determination result at the time of winning is other than that, since it is configured not to enter the special zone, whether or not the second special suggestion pending display is executed when executing the successful entry effect is determined. No decision value is assigned for determination.

  As described above, in this embodiment, it is possible to display the hold display in the second special suggestion mode only when the determination result at the time of winning is 15R probability variation big hit, 8R probability variation big hit, or super reach out of place. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to display the hold display in the second special suggestion mode even when the determination result at the time of winning is suddenly probable big hit, small hit, out of normal reach, or out of reach. Good.

  In this way, when the hold change pattern is other than P01, the second special suggestion hold display is executed at a higher rate in the case of executing the entry success effect than in the case of executing the entry failure effect. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion hold is executed, the display mode is more easily changed to “red” when entering the special zone than when not entering the special zone. Note that the display mode may not be changed to “red” when the special zone is not entered.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (B) is compared with the selection ratio of red suspension shown in FIG. 39 (B). For example, when the winning determination result is 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit, the selection ratio with red is 90% (see FIG. 39B), while the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 90%. % (See FIG. 41B). Further, for example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 39B), while the execution ratio of the second special suggestion hold is 30% or more. (See FIG. 41B). Therefore, the reliability for 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit is red on hold> second special suggestion hold.

  When it is determined to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold, the display of the second special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3717).

  When the new hold memory does not execute the rush advance notice effect to be notified in step S3714 or when the second special suggestion hold display is not executed in step S3716, the effect control CPU 101 has the new hold memory accompanied by a pseudo-continuation. It is determined whether or not it is pseudo-continuous hold (step S3718). For example, when a variation category 7 designation command, a variation category 22 designation command, or a variation category 25 designation command is received, it is determined that the pseudo continuous suspension is set. In the case of pseudo continuous hold, a pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to display pseudo continuous suggestion hold (step S3719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display pseudo-suggestion suggestion hold using the pseudo-sequential suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41C is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-continuous suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo-suggestion suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (C), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of pseudo-suggestion suggestion display is assigned for each winning determination result and hold change pattern. In the example shown in (C), in order to simplify the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for pseudo-suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit (when a variation category 22 designation command or a variation category 25 designation command is received), if the on-hold change pattern is P01, the pseudo-recommendation on-hold display at a rate of 20% Is determined not to display the pseudo-suggestion pending display at a rate of 80%. Further, if the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that display of pseudo continuous suggestion hold is executed at a rate of 30%, and display of pseudo continuous suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of place (when a variation category 7 designation command is received), if the hold change pattern is P01, the pseudo-recommendation hold display is executed at a rate of 10%. It is determined not to execute the pseudo-recommendation pending display at a rate of 90%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the pseudo continuous suggestion hold display is executed at a rate of 20% and the pseudo continuous suggestion hold display is not executed at a rate of 80%.

  When it is determined to display pseudo-suggestion suggestion hold, pseudo-suggestion suggestion display is started as a hold display for a new hold storage (step S3721).

  If the new hold memory is not pseudo continuous hold in step S3718, or if the pseudo continuous suggestion hold display is not executed in step S3720, the effect control CPU 101 is SP reach hold in which the new hold memory is developed to super reach. It is determined whether or not (step S3722). For example, if a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command, a variation category 12 designation command, a variation category 23 designation command, or a variation category 26 designation command is received, it is determined that the SP reach is pending. In the case of SP reach hold, an SP suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display SP suggestion hold is performed (step S3723). Specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the SP suggestion hold using the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG.

  FIG. 41D is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. In the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (D), a determination value corresponding to the presence / absence of execution of the SP suggestion hold display is assigned to each of the winning determination result and the hold change pattern. In the example shown in (), for the sake of simplification of description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines the decision item to which a determination value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit (when a variation category 23 designation command or a variation category 26 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, the indication of SP suggestion suspension at a rate of 30% Is determined not to display the SP suggestion pending display at a rate of 70%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and the display of SP suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 60%.

  For example, when the determination result at the time of winning is out of place (when a variation category 8 designation command, a variation category 10 designation command or a variation category 12 designation command is received), if the pending change pattern is P01, a rate of 20% It is determined that the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed at the rate of 80%. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the SP suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the SP suggestion hold is not executed at a rate of 70%.

  When it is determined to execute the hold display in the SP suggestion mode, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the pseudo-suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (C) with the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 41 (D), when the pending change pattern is other than P01, The execution ratio of the display of the suggestion hold is different from the execution ratio of the display of the SP suggestion hold. In other words, the effect suggestion display mode is changed to “red” at a different rate based on the type of the effect suggestion display mode. Thereby, attention can be paid to the type of effect suggestion display mode.

  If the new hold storage is not SP reach hold in step S3722, or if the SP suggestion hold display is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 uses a display mode corresponding to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702. The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, if any of P01, P02, and P04, the hold display starts with “white”, and if P03 or P05, the hold display starts with “red”.

  In this embodiment, as shown in steps S3710 to S3725, the display timing of the pending display of the effect suggesting mode is set at the time of starting winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the on-hold display or the active display of the effect suggestion mode may be displayed at any timing such as when the hold display is shifted, during the variable display, or during the active display.

  In this embodiment, by executing the processing in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing, the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode> second. Special suggestion mode> Pseudo-link suggestion mode> SP suggestion mode Therefore, for example, it is possible to collectively determine which of the first suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode to display the hold display or the active display. By providing a simple table, it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased. Or, even if the lottery is executed in advance as to whether or not the hold display or the active display is executed in each effect suggestion display mode as in the present embodiment, the execution ratio becomes lower as the lottery is executed first. By doing (by increasing the execution ratio as the lottery is executed later), it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect suggestion display mode among the plurality of effect suggestion display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters “special” and the characters “SP” is displayed. Also good. Specifically, the hold display can be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes by independently executing the first process to the fourth process described above. In addition, since the notice effect which the 1st special suggestion display mode and the 2nd special suggestion display mode suggest are both special zone effects, the hold display is performed in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. You may comprise so that it may not perform. For example, the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode may be preferentially displayed over the hold display in the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) (step S813). As described above, in this embodiment, the display result designation command is transmitted even when the power failure is restored (see step S44). However, as shown in FIG. Based on the fact that the variation pattern command has been received, the transition to the production symbol variation start processing is started and the variation display of the production symbol is started. The display will not start.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8001). Next, the CPU 101 for effect control displays the display result (stop) of the effect symbol according to the variation pattern command read in step S8002 and the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command). (Design) is determined (step S8002). That is, when the CPU 101 for effect control executes the process of step S8002, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stop of the effect symbol) according to the variable display pattern (variation pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. A display result determining means for determining (design) is realized. If the pseudo-ream is designated by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the chance stop symbol (for example, “223” or “445”) is used as the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream in step S8002. , A combination of symbols that are not reach, but one symbol is shifted from one symbol, or a combination of symbols including special images that may not be displayed normally (may be images other than numbers). Is also determined.) In addition, when it is determined in step S8002 that the effect control CPU 101 executes the continuous effect of the effect mode of “change in variation pattern at the time of symbol variation”, the so-called chance symbol symbol is used as the stop symbol of the effect symbol. (For example, a combination of symbols that are not reachable, such as “223” and “445”, but that is not one reach and one symbol is shifted). The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined effect stop symbols in the effect symbol display result storage area. In step S8002, the effect control CPU 101 may determine whether or not it is a big hit based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the effect symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit” (the received display result designation command designates display result 2 designation command or display result 3 designation). In the case of a command), the effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols in which three symbols are arranged in the same symbol as stop symbols. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the stop symbol may be varied depending on whether it is “15R probability variation big hit” or “8R probability variation big hit”. For example, in the case of “15R probability variation big hit”, the ratio of determining the combination of production symbols in which the three symbols are the same odd number is increased, and in the case of “8R probability variation big hit”, the three symbols are the same even number. You may make it raise the ratio which determines the combination of the production | presentation symbol arranged with the symbol.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates “suddenly probable big hit” or “small hit” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 5 designation command or a display result 6 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as “135” as the stop symbol. In the case of “out of” (when the received display result designation command is a display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols in which two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. The combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the “stop symbol” of the effect symbol.

  The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value matching the extracted random number.

  In addition, as for the effect symbols, a stop symbol reminiscent of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right are all the same symbols) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that recalls a loss is called a loss symbol.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a notice effect (for example, a step-up notice effect, a mini character notice effect, a movable object notice effect, an effect wing feature notice effect, etc.) in the effect display device 9 during the effect symbol variation display. It is determined whether or not to execute the notification effect setting process, and the notice effect setting process for setting the effect mode of the notice effect is executed (step S8003).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 executes special zone setting processing for setting the special zone effect (step S8003A).

  Next, when executing the variation pattern or the notice effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table corresponding to the notice effect (step S8004). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step S8005).

  FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram of a configuration example of a process table. The process table is a table in which process data referred to when the effect control CPU 101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls effect devices (effect components) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table includes data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data indicating each variation aspect constituting the variation aspect during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbols is described. Specifically, data relating to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. The process timer set value is set with a change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table and performs control to display the effect design in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 45 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. A process table is prepared for each variation pattern.

  The effect control CPU 101 is determined to execute the notice effect, and when executing the notice effect, the process table corresponding to the notice effect is selected in step S8004.

  In addition, in the process table used when effect control is executed for a variation pattern with reach effect, the left symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time further elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the symbols is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol in the pseudo-ream and the sliding effect. May be.

  In addition, the CPU 101 for effect control, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), effects device (effect display device 9 as an effect component, effect component as an effect component) Control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8006). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to perform on / off control of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 performs control so that the effect symbol is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command on a one-to-one basis. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the variation time specified by the variation pattern command in the variation time timer (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S802) (step S8008).

  FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the special zone setting process. In the special zone setting process shown in FIG. 46, the production control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the rush waiting flag is set (step S4601), and if it is set, subtracts “1” from the remaining number of times R. The obtained value is set as a new remaining count R (step S4602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value obtained by adding “1” to the set remaining number of times R is equal to the number of executions K (step S4603). If not, the special zone setting process is terminated. If it is the same value, the rush waiting flag is reset (step S4604), and the rush success effect and the special zone effect are set (step S4605). If the remaining number of times R is not 0, a special zone flag is set (N in step S4606, S4607). When the remaining number of times R is 0, the special zone effect is ended in the next change, so the special zone flag is not set.

  If the rush waiting flag is not set in step S4601, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the special zone flag is set (step S4608), and the special zone flag is set. Then, a special zone effect is set (step S4609), and a value obtained by subtracting “1” from the remaining number of times R is set as a new remaining number of times R (step S4610). When the remaining number of times R becomes “0”, the special zone flag is reset (Y in step S4611 and S4612).

  In step S4608, if the special zone flag is not set, it is determined whether or not the rush failure waiting flag is set (step S4613). If it is set, the remaining waiting number P is set to “1”. The subtracted value is set as a new remaining standby number P (step S4614). If the remaining standby number P becomes “0” (Y in step S4615), the entry failure effect is set (step S4616), and the entry failure wait flag is reset (step S4617).

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation in-process (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, it is determined whether or not it is the change timing of the active display (step S4701). Specifically, in the active information storage area described above, “active” is stored as the change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, it is determined that it is the change timing of the active display. . As described above, although active is stored as the change timing, if the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, the change display timing is determined as 1 second before the change stops. Shall. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the hold change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to “red”, and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to “gold”.

  Further, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the successful entry effect (step S4704). Specifically, when a rush success production is started in a variation having a variation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the rush success production is the end timing of the rush success production. When the rush success production is started during the fluctuation having the fluctuation time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the fluctuation stop is the end timing of the rush success production. If it is the end timing of the rush success effect, the display mode of the hold display or active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, and “red” if it is after the change timing. If it is P03, it is “red”, if it is P04, it is “white” if it is before both change timings, and it is “red” if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing. If the change timing is after both change timings, change to “gold”. If the change timing is P05, change to “red” if it is before the change timing, and change to “gold” if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the change that executed the successful entry effect is less than 8 seconds (period for executing the successful entry effect (3 seconds), display of the hold display or the active display after the successful entry effect is finished) The display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the stop of the fluctuation, when the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the waiting period (5 seconds) until the aspect is changed.

  In addition, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), whether or not it is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect (rush success effect or rush failure effect) Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush notice effect is started in a fluctuation having a fluctuation time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which three seconds have elapsed since the start of the rush notice effect is the end timing of the rush notice effect. When the rush advance notice effect is started during a change having a change time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the change stop is the end time of the rush notice effect. When it is the end timing of the rush announcement effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, and “red” if it is after the change timing. If it is P03, it is “red”, if it is P04, it is “white” if it is before both change timings, and it is “red” if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing. If the change timing is after both change timings, change to “gold”. If the change timing is P05, change to “red” if it is before the change timing, and change to “gold” if it is after the change timing.

  In addition, when the fluctuation time of the execution of the rush advance notice effect is less than 8 seconds (period for executing the rush advance notice effect (3 seconds), display of the hold display or the active display after the rush advance notice effect is finished) The display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the stop of the fluctuation, when the fluctuation time is shorter than the total period including the waiting period (5 seconds) until the aspect is changed.

  Further, when the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo continuous (step S4710). Specifically, in the pseudo-ream, re-variation is generally started after the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-variation timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo-ream. . Note that the first chance symbol stop timing may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo-ream.

  When it is the start timing of the pseudo-ream, the display form of the active display displayed in the pseudo-recommendation suggestion form is changed to a display form corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, and “red” if it is after the change timing. If it is P03, it will be “red”, if it is P04, it will be “red” if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and if it is after both change timings, it will be “gold”. In the case of P05, if it is before the change timing, it is changed to “red”, and if it is after the change timing, it is changed to “gold”.

  It should be noted that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the quasi-continuation, and when changing the display mode of the active display during the variation of the variation pattern, a predetermined variation stop is performed. It is good also as changing the display mode of an active display before time (for example, 1 second ago).

  If the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the timing predetermined for each variation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. If it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to a display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). Specifically, if the pending change pattern is P01, it is “white”, if it is P02, it is “white” if it is before the change timing, and “red” if it is after the change timing. If it is P03, it will be “red”, if it is P04, it will be “red” if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and if it is after both change timings, it will be “gold”. In the case of P05, if it is before the change timing, it is changed to “red”, and if it is after the change timing, it is changed to “gold”.

  It should be noted that a variation pattern is provided in which the variation ends before 5 seconds elapses from the start timing of the super reach production. When the display mode of the active display is changed during the variation pattern variation variation stop The display mode of the active display may be changed a predetermined time before (for example, one second before).

  Thereafter, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variation time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer setting value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Then, if the change time timer has timed out (step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol change stop process (step S803) (step S8112).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first checks whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that a stop symbol of the effect symbol is being displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S8305. In this embodiment, when a big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, a stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Accordingly, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set is a stage where the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed but the fanfare effect is not yet executed, and therefore the processing of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. Instead, the process proceeds to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (offset symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S8302). Then, if neither the big winning symbol nor the small winning symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, if the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the CPU 101 for effect control. Shifts to step S8313.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304) and receives the big hit start designation command. It is checked whether a big hit start designation command reception flag indicating that a small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set or not (step S8305). . When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306), and responds to the fanfare effect. A process table is selected (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the set flag.

  Then, the production control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number) According to the data 1, the movable member control data 1), the production device (the production display device 9 as the production component, various lamps as the production component, the speaker 27 as the production component, and the movable member 78 as the production component and production. The blades 79a and 79b) are controlled (step S8309). Thereafter, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither big hit nor small hit is made (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 resets a predetermined flag (step S8311). For example, the effect control CPU 101 resets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag and the second symbol variation designation command reception flag. The effect control CPU 101 may reset the command reception flag immediately after being referred to in the effect control process or the fourth symbol process (for example, as shown in step S811 in FIG. 42, the variation pattern). The fluctuation pattern command reception flag may be reset immediately after confirming the command reception flag). However, for example, because the symbol variation designation command is referred to in both the effect control process and the fourth symbol process, as shown in this embodiment, the effect symbol variation stop process or the like at the end of the variation. It is desirable to reset at the end of the big hit or at the end of the big hit effect processing. Then, the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) (step S8312).

  FIG. 49 and FIG. 50 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples in the case where the hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. First, (1) during a change in which an active display and two hold displays are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display corresponding to the hold memory is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (“ "Special?"). At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect with the reserved storage as a notice target is executed, and “3” is set as the execution count K and “3” is set as the remaining count R. Further, it is assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern and the first and second are determined as the change timing.

  Then, (3) the change ends at the gap, and (4) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new variation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. Then, the remaining number of times R becomes “2” (see step S4601), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number of times R and the number of times of execution K are the same value. (See S4605). Then, when 3 seconds elapses, (5) it is informed that the entry has been successful, and the special zone is entered. Then, at the timing 5 seconds later, the display mode of the hold display displayed in (6) the second special suggestion mode changes to “red” (see step S4708).

  Thereafter, (7) the change ends at the gap, and (8) the next change is started. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new variation is displayed, and the hold display is shifted. The hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in “red” is P04, and the first change is included in the change timing, so the display mode changes to “gold” (see step S662).

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display example when the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode. First, (1) during a change in which an active display and two hold displays are displayed, (2) a new hold memory is generated and the hold display corresponding to the hold memory is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (“ "Special?"). At this time, it is determined that the special zone effect having the reserved storage as a notice target is executed, and “1” is set as the execution count K and “3” is set as the remaining count R. Further, it is assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and that the second and active are determined as the change timing.

  Then, the change is performed several times, and (3) the change corresponding to the hold display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is started. At this time, an active display corresponding to the new variation is displayed. Then, the remaining number of times R becomes “0” (see step S4602), and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number of times R and the number of times of execution K become the same value. (See S4605). Then, when 3 seconds have passed, (4) it is notified that the entry has been successful, and a special zone is entered. Then, at the timing 5 seconds later, (5) the display mode of the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to “red” (see step S4708).

  Thereafter, (6) the active display hold change pattern is P04, and the change timing includes “active”. Therefore, the display mode changes to “gold” at the active display change timing (see step S4702).

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine is capable of executing variable display, and a specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, hold display, active display) is at least normal. A mode (in this example, “white”), a first specific mode (“red” in this example) with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (in this example, staging) Specific display means (in this example, for effect control) that can be displayed in any display mode including a suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) Steps S662, S662a, S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714 in the microcomputer 100) and the second An effect execution means capable of executing an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the fixed mode (in this example, steps S8006 and S8105 are executed according to the process table selected in step S8004 in the effect control microcomputer 100) The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then suggests the specific display in the second specific mode. When the effect of the specified content is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. Yes (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, and S471. When any one of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode that is the second display mode is set to the first display. It can be changed to “red” which is a specific embodiment). Thereby, the expectation with respect to a specific aspect can be raised.

  In this embodiment, a single display mode (“white”, “red”) is provided as the “normal mode” and the “first specific mode”, respectively. A plurality of display modes may be provided as at least one of the “first specific modes”. In addition, a plurality of display modes (a first special suggestion mode, a second special suggestion mode, a pseudo-link suggestion mode, and an SP suggestion mode) are provided as the “second specific mode”. ”May be provided with a single display mode.

  Further, the effect suggested by the “specific display of the second specific mode” is not limited to the above-described effect, but a step-up notice effect that develops in stages, a character notice effect that a character appears, and a speech effect that displays a speech Any effect such as a button effect that prompts the player to operate the operation button 120 and an effect effect that changes the display mode of the hold display or active display may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, the display mode that suggests the effect by characters (“special”, “special?”, “NEXT”, “SP”) is the “second specific mode”, but the character, button, or pattern The content of the production may be suggested.

  Further, in this embodiment, five seconds after the start of the special zone effect, the pseudo-ream effect, or the super reach effect, “after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the specific display of the second specific mode is displayed. It is said that “the production of the content suggested by“ is performed ”, but this is not restrictive. For example, it may be at the time when the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed, or the timing before and after the time.

  Further, in this embodiment, each effect is started when “the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed after the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode”. Although it decided to unify after 5 seconds, it is not restricted to this. For example, a different timing is set in advance for each presentation of the suggestion content (for example, if the presentation of the suggestion content is a pseudo-continuous, 3 seconds after the start of the pseudo-continuation, if the suggestion content is a super-reach start, a super reach starts 4 seconds later), or one of a plurality of timings may be determined by lottery. When determining by lottery, it may be different depending on whether or not the lottery ratio is a big hit. Thereby, a sense of expectation can be given by the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes from the second specific mode to the first specific mode.

  In this embodiment, the pending change pattern and the change timing are determined by different lotteries. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of pieces of data including information on a hold change pattern and change timing (that is, data in which a display mode is changed at which timing in advance) are provided, and a hold change corresponding to any data is performed. It is good also as deciding whether to perform by lottery.

  Further, the change timing of the display mode of the hold display or the active display may not be determined in advance. For example, whether or not the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed every time the change starts. May be determined by lottery. Further, the display mode after the change may not be determined in advance. For example, it may be determined by lottery which display mode is changed at the change timing.

  In this embodiment, the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode are determined by different lotteries as the display mode of the hold display or the active display, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of display mode change patterns including a normal display mode and an effect suggestion display mode may be provided, and it may be determined in which change pattern the display mode is changed.

  In this embodiment, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode, the normal display mode is not displayed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if the normal display mode hold display or active display is displayed as an image with a lower display priority than the display suggestion display mode hold display or active display, Even during active display, display similar to that in this embodiment can be performed without interrupting display control in the normal display mode (change control of the display mode at the change timing).

  Further, in this embodiment, the effect execution means may not execute the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode even if the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode (this book In the example, the production control microcomputer 100 can display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode even when the special zone production is not executed by performing step S3715 after Y in step S3714. That is, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode, the special zone effect which is the suggestion content may not be executed.), The specific display means of the second specific mode Even if the production of the content suggested by the specific display is not executed, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the second specific mode is the first special mode. (In this example, the production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4706 to S4708 to display the hold display or the active display in the second special suggestion mode. Even when the special zone effect is not executed, it can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). Thereby, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation when the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is not executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having a higher expectation than the second specific mode (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 The pending change pattern for displaying “red” as the first specific mode is selected at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while the display of the second special suggestion mode as the second specific mode is displayed in FIG. By determining at the ratio shown in (B) (step S3715), a hold display or an active display is displayed in “red”, which is more reliable than the second special suggestion mode to be 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit. Can be displayed). Thereby, the expectation with respect to a 1st specific aspect can be raised.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific display means can display the specific display in the first specific mode having higher expectation than the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (this example) Then, the production control microcomputer 100 selects the pending change pattern for displaying “red”, which is the first specific mode, at the ratio shown in FIG. 39B (step S3701), while suggesting the second specific mode. By determining whether or not to execute the special zone effect, which is the content, at a ratio shown in FIG. 36A (step S3505), the reliability is higher for 15R probability variation big hit or 8R probability variation big hit than the special zone effect. “Red” indicates that the hold display or active display can be displayed). Thereby, the expectation with respect to a 1st specific aspect can be raised.

  Further, in this embodiment, the specific display means can further change the display mode of the specific display changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (in this example, the production control microcomputer 100 is suspended. When P04 is selected as the change pattern and active is selected as the change timing, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is performed by executing steps S4701 and S4702 after executing steps S4705, S4708, S4711, and S4714. Can be changed from “effect suggestion display mode” to “red” and further to “gold”). Thereby, the expectation with respect to the display mode of the specific display after changing to the 1st specific mode can be raised.

  In this embodiment, the specific display means includes a plurality of types of second specific modes having different suggested contents (in this example, a first special suggesting mode, a second special suggesting mode, a pseudo-link suggesting mode, an SP suggesting mode). The specific display can be displayed at, and the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode at a different rate based on the type of the second specific mode (in this example, for effect control) The microcomputer 100 determines whether or not to display in each effect suggestion display mode by using the tables shown in FIGS. 41A to 41D, thereby holding a change pattern that includes “red” (other than P01). ), The ratio of which effect suggestion display mode is displayed is different, so that it is changed to “red” at a different ratio depending on the type of the effect suggestion display mode.) did. Thereby, attention can be paid to the display mode of the specific display.

  In this embodiment, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, the pseudo continuous effect is always executed with the corresponding fluctuation. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the suggestion mode, a case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed and a case where it is not executed may be provided. Similarly, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the SP suggestion mode, a case where the super reach effect is executed and a case where the super reach effect is not executed may be provided.

  In this embodiment, since the variation can be recognized (prefetched) based on the variation category command received at the time of starting winning, it can be recognized (prefetched) that the variation involves one or two pseudo-reams. Alternatively, the pseudo-link suggesting mode can be executed with a change involving two pseudo-runs as a target of notice, but the pseudo-suggestion suggesting mode may be executed even with a change involving three times of pseudo-run as a target of notice. .

  Moreover, as a change mode in the pending change pattern, not only a normal display mode but also an effect suggestion display mode is included, and the change mode to the normal display mode and the effect suggestion display mode can be determined collectively. Good. For example, the hold change pattern that changes from “white” to the first special suggestion display mode, the hold change pattern that changes from the second special suggestion display mode to “red”, or from “white” to the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, In addition, a plurality of hold change patterns such as a hold change pattern that changes to “red” and a hold change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode are provided, and one of the hold change patterns is selected. It is good as well.

  In this embodiment, the pending change pattern is determined using the common pending change pattern determination table (see FIG. 39A) regardless of the winning determination result. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It is not a thing. For example, a plurality of pending change pattern determination tables may be provided, and the pending change pattern may be determined using the pending change pattern determination table corresponding to the received variation category command.

  For example, when a variation category command indicating that the variation is an out-of-sequence variation with pseudo-continuations is received, the above-described pending change patterns P01 to P05 are changed from “white” to the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode and further changed to “red”. The pending change pattern may be determined using a pending change pattern determination table including a pending change pattern that changes and a pending change pattern that changes from pseudo-simulation suggestion to “red”. In addition, for example, when a variation category command indicating that it is a big hit variation with super reach is received, the above-described pending change patterns P01 to P05 change from “white” to the second special suggestion display mode, On-hold change pattern that changes to “red”, on-hold change pattern that changes from “white” to the SP suggestion display mode, onset that changes from the first special suggestion display mode to the SP suggestion display mode, and further changes to “red” The hold change pattern may be determined using a hold change pattern determination table including the change pattern.

In addition, although explanation is omitted in this embodiment, it is determined at the time of starting winning that the fluctuation is accompanied by a pseudo-run including a plurality of re-changes, and it is determined to display a hold display in a pseudo-link suggestion mode. In this case, it may be possible to determine at which re-variation timing the change from the pseudo-continuous suggestion mode to the normal display mode (for example, “red” or “gold”). For example, when it is decided to change the display mode at the first re-variation timing, the execution of the pseudo-ream including the first re-variation is suggested by the pseudo-recommendation mode, while the second re-variation is suggested. When it is determined to change the display mode at the change timing, the execution of the pseudo-run including two re-changes is suggested by the pseudo-run suggestion mode. In other words, when it is determined at the time of starting winning that the variation is accompanied by a pseudo-relation including a plurality of re-variations, and it is determined to display the hold display in a pseudo-recommendation suggestion mode, the pseudo-reaction including one re-variation is included. It may be possible to determine whether the execution of a series is to be suggested or whether the execution of a pseudo series including two re-variations is to be suggested.

  Further, a plurality of display modes are provided as the pseudo continuous suggestion mode, and the number of re-variations may be suggested depending on which type of pseudo continuous suggestion mode is displayed. For example, in the case where pseudo-continuous suggestion modes A to C are provided and the pseudo-reams that perform the re-variation once, it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-recommendation suggestion mode A, and the re-variation is performed twice It is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggesting mode B if it is a pseudo-run, and it is easy to display the hold display in the pseudo-link suggesting mode C if it is a pseudo-run that performs three re-variations. Also good.

  In this embodiment, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the change is started. However, the start timing (the entry timing) of the special zone effect is not limited to this. For example, the special zone effect may be started at a timing when the change starts or at a predetermined timing during execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a super reach effect). Further, if the fluctuation is accompanied by pseudo-continuations, the special zone effect may be started at the first re-variation timing or the second re-variation timing. In addition, it may be determined by lottery at which timing of the plurality of timings to start the special zone effect.

  Further, the first effect device and the second effect device are provided, a specific display can be displayed using the first effect device, and a change effect capable of changing the display mode of the specific display can be executed. The first change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display using and the second change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display according to the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. It is possible that the degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 1 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the first modification, a sub-display device 9S configured by a liquid crystal display device (LCD) having a size smaller than that of the liquid crystal display device (LCD) constituting the effect display device 9 is provided below the effect display device 9 described above. It has been. The display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an area (total pending storage display unit) 18c for displaying the total number (total pending storage number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Yes.

  The display screen of the sub display device 9S is provided with an active display area 9A in which an active display is displayed.

  In the first modification, the hold change notice effect can be executed as the prefetch notice effect. The hold change notice effect is an effect of changing the hold display to a special display mode (in this example, blue or red round display) different from the normal mode (in this example, black round display). In the first modification, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the hold display is started in the normal mode at the timing when the start winning is generated, and then the action effect (the action described later) is performed at the timing of the shift of the hold display. The effect A and the effect effect B) are executed, and the effect that the hold display to be notified changes to one of the special display modes is executed (therefore, in the first modification, the change change notice effect is at least an action. Including both the part that performs the production and the part that changes the hold display of the notice target). If the display mode of the hold display is changed after the hold change notice effect is executed, the hold storage of the notice target is digested at the timing when the variable display of the notice target is subsequently started, and the special display mode of the notice target is displayed. While the hold display is erased, the special display mode active display is displayed in the active display area 9A. Then, when the change display of the notice target is finished, the active display of the special display mode is deleted. Therefore, in the first modification, when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display of the special display mode (hold display, active display) is continued until the change display of the notice target is finished.

  In the first modification, when a start winning occurs, the effect control CPU 101 uses the hold change notice effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the hold change notice effect in the hold display control process (step S800C). Thus, a lottery process based on a random number is performed to determine the presence and type of a pending change notice effect. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 executes the set hold change notice effect in the effect symbol fluctuation start process (step S801).

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram of a specific example of the pending change notice effect determination table in the first modification. As shown in FIG. 52, in Modification 1, determination values are assigned to the hold change notice effect 1 to 6 in the hold change notice effect determination table without hold change notice effect. As shown in FIG. 52, in Modification 1, there are six types of hold change notice effects 1 to 6 as hold change notice effects.

  The hold change notice effect 1 does not change the display mode of the hold display in the normal form (in this example, black round display) only by executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. It is. In addition, the hold change notice effect 2 only performs the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift, and does not change the hold display display mode in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). This is a notice effect. Therefore, in the first modification, when the hold change notice effect 1 or the hold change notice effect 2 is executed, only the action effect (action effect A or action effect B) is executed, and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Since it does not change, it corresponds to the so-called Gase hold change notice effect.

  The hold change notice effect 3 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 4 is a hold change notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display to a blue round display while executing the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift. The hold change notice effect 5 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect A at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display. The hold change notice effect 6 is a hold change notice effect that executes the action effect B at the timing of the hold display shift and changes the display mode of the hold display to a red round display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 52, in Modification 1, there are two types of action effects A and action effects B as action effects executed in the pending change notice effect. The action effect A is an action effect performed using only the sub display device 9S (sub display device). The action effect B is an action effect performed using the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In addition, when performing the effect, it is not performed using only the liquid crystal display device. For example, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker at the timing when the hold display or the active display is changed, or a lamp or LED is emitted. For example, it may be accompanied by an effect by another effect device.

  As shown in FIG. 52, in the first modification, when the determination result indicated by the variation category command is non-reach deviation or when the super reach is deviation, the determination result indicated by the variation category command is a super reach big hit. In some cases, execution of the pending change notice effect may be determined.

  In the first modification, the hold change notice effect is an effect that can change the display mode of the hold display using the sub display device 9S (in this example, the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect 3). , And hold change notice effect 5. Hereinafter, the first hold change notice effect) and an effect in which the display mode of the hold display can be changed by the manner in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are linked (this example). Now, it is roughly divided into hold change notice effect 2 with action effect B, hold change notice effect 4, and hold change notice effect 6. Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a second hold change notice effect). As shown, in the case of a super reach big hit, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is executed is relatively higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, when non-reach or super-reach is lost, the ratio at which the second hold change notice effect is relatively executed is higher than the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect is executed. It is low. Therefore, in the first modification, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. In comparison, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  Further, in the first modification, there are a change mode of the display mode of the hold display, in which the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display and a red round display. As shown in FIG. 52, when the first hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the blue round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the red round display. . Also, as shown in FIG. 52, when the second hold change notice effect is executed, the rate of change to the red round display is relatively higher than the rate of change to the blue round display. Yes. Therefore, in the first modification, depending on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display of the notice target is a blue round shape. The display ratio of the display and the red round display is different.

  Further, in the first modification, even when the hold change notice effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change (that is, the gas change hold notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 2) is executed. If you want to) In addition, as shown in FIG. 52, the ratio at which the first hold change notice effect of Gasse (in this example, hold change notice effect 1) is executed is higher than the second hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, It is higher than the rate at which the hold change notice effect 2) is executed. Therefore, in the first modification, the rate at which the display mode of the hold display of the notice target changes depends on whether the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed. Specifically, in the first modified example, the second hold change notice effect of Gasse (in this example, the hold change notice effect 2) is the first hold change notice effect of Gase (in this example, the hold change notice effect). Since the execution rate is lower than 1), the rate at which the hold display of the notification target changes is relatively greater when the second hold change notice effect is executed than when the first hold change notice effect is executed. Is expensive. In addition, not only in the mode shown in the first modification, on the contrary, the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed is relatively more noticeable than the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed. You may comprise so that the ratio that a hold display changes may become high.

  Note that the method of allocating the determination of the pending change notice effect is not limited to that shown in the first modification. For example, when it is configured so that there is a case where it is possible to recognize which hold display in the combined hold storage display unit 18c is the subject of notice in the stage before the change of the hold indication, and a case where it cannot be recognized, The execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at different rates depending on whether the hold display can be recognized or not. In this case, for example, a hold display in a display mode (for example, a white round display) that is different from the normal mode but different from the final change mode (in this example, blue or red round display) in the hold change notice effect. In addition, when a hold display (so-called white hold display) that suggests that the display mode is changed is configured to be displayable, any hold display is notified depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed. We can infer whether it can be a target. Therefore, the execution of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the white hold display is displayed.

  Moreover, in this modification 1, although the case where the display mode of the hold display is changed only once in the hold change notice effect is shown, the display mode of the hold display may be configured to be changed a plurality of times (further, It may be configured to be able to change multiple times including after the active display.) In this case, it may be configured to collectively determine the number of times of change, the change pattern at which each timing, and the display mode (color, etc.). Also, for example, in the case of a configuration that can be changed a plurality of times including after the active display, the change pattern including the change after the active display is collectively determined in the pending change notice effect determination process. Alternatively, only the change pattern of the hold display is determined in the hold change notice effect determination process, and the change pattern after the active display is determined is determined by the effect symbol change start process at the start of change. May be.

  Moreover, in this modification 1, although the case where an effect effect is always performed in the hold change notice effect is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect, and the display mode of the hold display changes without performing the effect effect. You may comprise so that there may be. In addition, in the case where a hold change notice effect without such an effect is executed, and when the display mode of the hold display (including the active display) may be changed a plurality of times as described above, You may comprise so that the effect presentation may be performed at the timing of the change timing of multiple times, and the number of executions of the effect presentation may be determined.

  Further, in this modified example 1, when the action effect B is executed, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the action effect A is executed, or the so-called “gase hold change” Although the case where the degree of advantage is high, such as a small proportion of the notice effect, is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, conversely, when the effect effect B is executed, the advantage degree may be lower than when the effect effect A is executed.

  Next, a specific example of the production mode of the pending change notice effect will be described. 53 and 54 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the effect mode of the pending change notice effect in the first modification. Among these, FIG. 53 shows a specific example of the production mode of the first hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 1, hold change notice effect 3, hold change notice effect 5). FIG. 54 shows a specific example of the production mode of the second hold change notice effect (hold change notice effect 2, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6). 53 and 54, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1) (2) (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 53, an effect aspect of the first pending change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 53 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is performing the variable display of the middle left and right effect symbols, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated, and the number of on-hold displays is increased by one in the total on-hold storage display unit 18c to three. Further, it is assumed that the first hold change notice effect is determined to be executed based on the occurrence of a new start prize. In the example shown in FIG. 53, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 53 (3), one reserved storage is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 53 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the effect A (for example, 1 second after the start of the change), as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the effect A is started in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). In this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), as an effect A, an arrow 200 flies in the direction of the active display area 9A and the summed pending storage display unit 18c in the sub display device 9S (sub display device). Various effects are executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the combined hold storage display unit 18c performs an effect in a manner that the arrow 200 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect A (for example, 6 seconds after the start of fluctuation), as shown in FIG. 53 (6), the action effect A is ended in the sub display device 9S (sub display device), The display mode of the hold display is changed. For example, if the hold change notice effect 3 is executed, the hold display to be notified in FIG. 53 (6) is changed to a blue round display, and if the hold change notice effect 5 is executed, In 53 (6), the hold display for the notice is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 53, the case where the hold change notice effect 3 or the hold change notice effect 5 is executed as the first hold change notice effect is shown. 53 (4) and (5), only the effect A is executed. In FIG. 53 (6), the on-hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). It will not (so-called Gase's first pending change notice effect). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 53 may be performed so that the arrow does not hit due to the hold display being warped.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 54, an effect mode of the second reserved change notice effect will be described. In the example shown in FIG. 54 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 9 (main display device) is executing the middle-right effect symbol variation display, and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) is active display. In the area 9A, a predetermined display (active display) is displayed corresponding to the variable display during the current execution, and two hold displays are displayed on the combined hold storage display unit 18c (that is, two hold memories are displayed). Have accumulated). Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (2), it is assumed that a new start prize is generated and the number of hold indications is increased by one in the total hold storage display unit 18c to be three. Further, it is assumed that the second hold change notice effect is decided to be executed based on the occurrence of a new start prize. In the example shown in FIG. 54, it is assumed that it is decided to execute the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6. Then, it is assumed that the variable display is ended as shown in FIG. 54 (3), one reserved storage is consumed, and the next variable display is started as shown in FIG. 54 (4). Further, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), it is assumed that the reserved display is decreased by one in the total reserved storage display unit 18c and becomes two by digesting one reserved storage.

  Next, at the start timing of the action effect B (for example, 1 second after the start of change), as shown in FIG. 54 (4), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) The used effect B is started. In this example, as shown in FIG. 54 (4), as the effect effect B, the effect display is directed toward the active display area 9A of the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the summed hold storage display unit 18c. In the device 9 (main display device), an effect in which the arrow 201 flies is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the straw arrow 201 flies over from the effect display device 9 (men display device) to the sub display device 9S (sub display device), and the sub display device 9S (sub display). In the total hold storage display unit 18c of the device, an effect is performed in such a manner that the arrow 201 hits the hold display to be notified.

  Then, at the end timing of the action effect B (for example, 6 seconds after the start of change), the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are switched as shown in FIG. The used effect presentation B is ended, and the display mode of the hold display to be notified is changed. For example, if the hold change notice effect 4 is executed, the notice target hold display is changed to a blue round display in FIG. 54 (6), and if the hold change notice effect 6 is executed, In 54 (6), the hold display to be notified is changed to a red round display.

  In the example shown in FIG. 54, the case where the hold change notice effect 4 or the hold change notice effect 6 is executed as the second hold change notice effect is shown, but when the hold change notice effect 2 is executed. 54 (4) and (5), only the effect effect B is executed. In FIG. 54 (6), the on-hold display changes in the normal mode (in this example, black round display). No (this is the so-called second hold change notice effect of Gase). In this case, for example, an effect such that the arrow flies in the same manner as in FIG. 54 may be performed such that the hold display is warped and the arrow does not hit.

  As described above, according to the first modification, the first effect device (in this example, the sub display device 9S (sub display device)) and the second effect device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device) Display device)), and can display a specific display (in this example, a hold display) using the first effect device (in this example, the secondary display device 9S has a combined hold storage display unit 18c). A change effect that can change the display mode of the display (in this example, a pending change notice effect) can be executed. In this case, the first change effect that can change the display mode of the specific display using the first effect device (in this example, the first hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1 with the action effect A, the hold change notice effect) 3, the hold change notice effect 5)) and the second change effect (in this example, the second hold change notice in which the display form of the specific display can be changed in a manner in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. Effects (holding change notice effect 2 with action effects B, hold change notice effect 4, hold change notice effect 6)) can be executed. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the specific display changes (in this example, as shown in FIG. When an effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the advantage (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. high). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In the first modification, the hold display is described as “specific display”, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the corresponding display (active display) corresponding to the variable display may be “specific display”. Specifically, a corresponding display corresponding to the variable display (for example, an active display corresponding to the currently displayed variable display) can be displayed using the first effect device during the execution of the variable display (for example, the secondary display). There is an active display area in which the active display is displayed on the display device 9S), and a change effect that can change the display mode of the corresponding display (for example, the active display is a special display different from the normal mode (for example, black round display)) A first change effect (for example, an active display change notice effect for changing to a blue or red round display) can be executed, and the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed using the first effect device (for example, The first active display change notice effect) that can change the display mode of the active display using the sub display device 9S, and the correspondence table according to the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked. The second change effect (for example, the second active display change notice effect that can change the display mode of the active display according to the mode in which the effect display device 9 and the sub display device 9S are linked) is executed. The degree of expectation varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed and the display mode of the corresponding display changes (for example, the second active display change notice effect is executed and activated) When the display mode of the display changes, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is higher than when the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the active display changes) Good. Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by making it possible to execute a plurality of types of changing effects. In addition, since the degree of expectation varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Note that in the first modification, both the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect can be executed as change effects (however, in one variable display, the hold change notice effect and the active display change notice effect are executed in duplicate. The game machine is configured so that only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect can be executed as the change effect (the other effect is not executed at all). May be.

  Further, in the first modification, for example, when the gaming state, the production state, and various setting states in the gaming machine are in a specific state, only one of the hold change notice effect or the active display change notice effect is executed. In the state different from the specific state, the other effect may be executed. Moreover, in a further different state, you may comprise so that both an on-hold change notice effect and an active display change notice effect may be performed, and various structure aspects can be considered.

  In the first modification, the first effect device is the sub display device 9S (sub display device) and the second effect device is the effect display device 9 (main display device). The second effect device is not limited to such a liquid crystal display device. For example, the first effect device or the second effect device may be configured with a movable member (effect effect) that can move. Further, for example, the liquid crystal display device may be configured to be movable, and the first effect device and the second effect device may be configured by the liquid crystal display device configured to be movable. Furthermore, not only a liquid crystal display device and a movable member (production effect), but also a light emitter such as a lamp or LED, or a sound output device such as a speaker may be used as the effect device.

  Moreover, in the modification 1, although the case where two effect devices, the effect display device 9 (main display device) and the sub display device 9S (sub display device) are used, was not limited to two but more than three effects. You may comprise so that a pending | holding change notice effect and an active display change notice effect can be performed using an apparatus.

  As an example using three effect devices, for example, an effect effect may be executed using three liquid crystal display devices. In this case, for example, the first liquid crystal display device is configured to be movable, the arrow is displayed while moving the first liquid crystal display device, and the arrow passes through the main display device to display the sub-display. You may comprise so that an effect effect may be performed in the aspect which flies toward the active display of an apparatus, and a hold display.

  Further, for example, as the three effect devices, an effect effect may be configured to be executable using a liquid crystal display device, an LED, and an effect accessory. In this case, for example, when the stage effect is movable, the LEDs emit light sequentially from the LED located in the vicinity of the moved stage effect, and when the light reaches the LED located in the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device, You may comprise so that an effect presentation may be performed in the aspect from which the display mode of the active display on a display screen of a liquid crystal display device or a hold display changes.

  In addition, when the action effect is configured to be executable using three or more effect devices as described above, the degree of advantage increases as the effect effect is executed in conjunction with a larger number of effect devices (for example, It may be configured such that the ratio of producing the effect is reduced or changes to an advantageous change mode). On the contrary, you may comprise so that an advantage degree may become low as a larger number of production | presentation apparatuses interlock | cooperate and an effect production is performed.

  Moreover, in the modification 1, "the 2nd change effect which can change the display mode of correspondence display by the mode which made the 1st effect device and the 2nd effect device interlock | cooperate" means the 1st effect device and the 2nd effect device. Is to execute the second change effect by acting in some manner. For example, “the second change effect in which the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed by the mode in which the first effect device and the second effect device are linked” means that the effect display device 9 (main display) as shown in FIG. On the display screen of the device, an image such as an arrow is displayed so as to fly toward the sub display device 9S (sub display device) that displays the hold display and the active display. Such an effect display may be performed. In addition, for example, in the case where it is configured so as to include an effect item instead of the main display device, the effect item moves so as to move toward the hold display or the active display so that it acts by a physical operation. It may be shown.

  Further, in the first modification, there are a plurality of display modes in which the hold display can be changed (for example, a blue round display and a red round display), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of the display mode to which the hold display changes varies (for example, which one of the first hold change notice effect or the second hold change notice effect is executed) Depending on whether the display mode of the hold display has changed, the ratio of whether the hold display to be notified changes to a blue round display or a red round display may be different). Therefore, since the change mode differs depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  There are a plurality of display modes in which the corresponding display can be changed (for example, a blue round display and a red round display), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed to display the corresponding display mode. Depending on whether the corresponding display changes, the ratio of which display mode changes is different (for example, the first active display change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the active display Depending on whether the display mode has changed, the ratio of whether the active display changes to a blue round display or a red round display may be different). Therefore, since the change mode differs depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  Also, in the first modification, even when the change effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display does not change (for example, the case of the hold change notice effect (the hold change notice effect 1, the hold change notice effect 2) is executed) ), And the rate of change of the display mode of the hold display varies depending on whether the first change effect or the second change effect is executed (for example, the second hold change notice effect is executed relatively). It is also possible that the rate of change of the hold display of the notice target is higher than the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed). Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the hold display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, the player can be interested in which change effect is executed.

  In addition, there is a case where the display mode of the corresponding display does not change even when the change effect is executed (for example, the case where the active display change notice effect is executed), and either the first change effect or the second change effect is executed. Depending on whether or not the display mode of the corresponding display changes, the rate of change of the display mode of the corresponding display varies (for example, the first active display change notice effect is executed when the second active display change notice effect is relatively executed) It is also possible that the rate at which the active display changes is higher than the case). Therefore, since the rate at which the display mode of the corresponding display changes varies depending on which change effect is executed, it is possible to make the player interested in which change effect is executed.

  Moreover, in the modification 1, when a 2nd change production is performed and a display mode changes, a expectation degree becomes high compared with the case where a 1st change production is performed and a display mode changes (for example, When the second hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes, the degree of expectation for the big hit is compared with the case where the first hold change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display changes. When the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed, the first active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display is changed. Compared to the case, the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.) Therefore, the player's expectation can be improved by executing the second change effect.

  When the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the first hold change notice effect or the first active display change notice effect is executed. Compared with the case where the display mode of the hold display or active display is changed, the expectation level (reliability) for the big hit may be higher, and conversely, the first hold change notice effect or the first active display. When a change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes, the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or active display changes. Compared to the case, the degree of expectation (reliability) for the big hit may be increased.

  Further, in the first modification, the big hit expectation degree may be higher when the second hold change notice effect or the second active display change notice effect is executed and the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed. However, not only the big hit expectation degree, for example, the expectation degree for the probability variation big hit, the reach expectation degree, and the expectation degree for the occurrence of the pseudo-ream may be increased. In addition, for example, the degree of expectation as to whether or not the hold display or active display changes, and when there are a plurality of types of change modes, the degree of expectation as to whether the hold display or active display changes will be increased. May be.

  Further, according to the first modification, the second effect device is the main display device (in this example, the effect display device 9 (main display device)), and the first effect device is the sub-display device (in this example). Sub display device 9S (sub display device). Therefore, the effect of changing effects can be improved by using the main display device and the sub display device.

  Further, a common change effect can be executed when the display mode of the hold display is changed and when the display mode of the corresponding display is changed (for example, the first hold change notice effect is executed as shown in FIG. 53). And the case where the first active display change notice effect is executed, the effect effect A is executed in the same effect manner, as shown in Fig. 54, and the case where the second hold change notice effect is executed. In the case of executing the second active display change notice effect, the action effect B is executed in the same effect manner, but strictly speaking, an arrow hits depending on which hold display or active display is the subject of the notice. Since the destinations are different, some of the productions are common.) Therefore, it can be noted which of the hold display and the corresponding display changes, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  In the first modification, the action effect A is executed when the first hold change notice effect is executed and the first active display change notice effect is executed, and the second hold change notice effect is executed. Both the action effect B executed in the second active display change notice effect may be executed in the same effect mode, or only one of them may be executed in the same mode. Also good. For example, when the first hold change notice effect is executed and when the first active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect A is executed in the same effect mode, while the second hold change notice effect is executed. And the second active display change notice effect may be configured to execute an effect effect B having a different effect mode. On the other hand, for example, when the second hold change notice effect is executed and when the second active display change notice effect is executed, the action effect B is executed in the same effect manner, while the first hold change notice is executed. You may comprise so that the effect production A of the production aspect different in the case where an effect may be performed and a 1st active display change notice effect may be performed.

  In addition, the specific display can be changed to the display mode indicating the reliability of the big hit after the action effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, after executing the effect, the specific display may be changed to a display mode that suggests the content of the effect (for example, the second specific mode described above).

  In addition, the game machine is capable of variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player, and displays a specific display that suggests the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state by a display mode, and is controlled to the advantageous state. In a variable display execution period, a specific notification that the display mode of the specific display changes and the advantageous state is controlled after the predetermined notification that the advantageous state is not controlled is performed. It may be performed. Specifically, a description will be given using Modification 2 below. Note that description of the same portions as those in the above-described embodiment is omitted.

  In the second modification, the above-described active display may be referred to as “current display”. In the second modification, the above-described hold change pattern may be referred to as a “holding effect pattern”. In Modification 2, white, yellow, red, and rainbow colors are provided as the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the current display. The expected degree of jackpot is rainbow> red> yellow> white.

  In the second modification, the effect display device 9 described above may be referred to as an “image display device 5”. In the display area of the image display device 5, for example, a hold display area 5H and a current display area 5K are arranged.

  In the hold display area 5H, the number of hold of variable display of decorative symbols corresponding to the special figure game is displayed in an identifiable manner. For example, in the hold display area 5H, the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of hold of the variable display of decorative symbols is displayed in such a manner that the winning order (digestion order) is known. Specifically, a decorative symbol holding display corresponding to the first special symbol game (first special symbol variation) and a decorative symbol holding display corresponding to the second special symbol game (second special symbol variation) are awarded. They are arranged in order and displayed in the hold display area 5H. In the hold display area 5H, the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started is erased (digested) and the hold to be deleted every time the variable display of the decorative pattern corresponding to the special game is started. When there is another hold display in addition to the display, the display position of the other hold display is moved (shifted) to the hold display side (the current display area 5K side) from which the display position is deleted.

  In the current display area 5K, a current display (sometimes referred to as a digestion display or an active display) is displayed. The current display is displayed according to the variable display of the decorative symbol corresponding to the digested hold display (displayed instead of the hold display digested when the hold display is digested).

  FIG. 55 is a diagram illustrating a display example of the image display device according to the second modification. In FIG. 55, regarding the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the current display, white is shown as a circle, yellow as a square, red as a double circle, and rainbow as a star. In addition, when the hold display HH1 shown in FIG. 55A is won, “PB'3 (super reach (big hit))” is determined as the variable display variable category corresponding to the hold display HH1 and corresponds to the hold display HH1. It is assumed that “HP5” is determined as an effect pattern such as hold.

  The variation category “PB′3” is a variation category of super reach (big hit). In the fluctuation category “PB′3”, a fluctuation pattern “PB′3-1” that develops from normal B to super reach A (hereinafter referred to as “super A”) and becomes a big hit, and normal B to super reach B (hereinafter, referred to as “super reach A”). The variation pattern “PB'3-2” which develops into a big hit by developing to Super B), the variation pattern “PB'3-3” which develops from Super B to Super A and becomes a relief big hit, and the normal B through super The variation pattern “PB′3-4” which develops into B and becomes a relief jackpot belongs. The relief jackpot is a jackpot in which a jackpot notification is made after a loss notification is once made. The loss once notified before the big hit notification is also referred to as temporary loss. Therefore, the relief jackpot is also referred to as a jackpot after temporary losing. As another variation pattern, a variation pattern “PA′3-1” or the like which is shifted from normal B to super A is provided.

  The on-hold effect pattern “HP5” is an on-hold effect pattern in which the display mode of the hold display is white, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is yellow, and the display mode of the current display (after reach) is red. .

  FIG. 55A shows a scene in which a fixed decorative pattern (“4”, “1”, “3”) that is not a jackpot combination in the variable display corresponding to the current display KH0 displayed in the current display area 5K is stopped and displayed. Represents. The current display KH0 is displayed in the hold display area 5H as the hold display HH0 (not shown) in the previous variable display (not shown) as described in parentheses as “original HH0”. Moreover, the hold display HH1 displayed in the hold display area 5H in FIG. 55 (A) is a hold display to be digested next. Since the display mode of the hold display is white in the effect pattern “HP5” such as the hold, the display mode of the hold display HH1 is white (circle) as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 (B) is a scene following FIG. 55 (A), and shows a scene where variable display corresponding to the current display KH1 displayed in the current display area 5K is started. The current display KH1 is displayed in the hold display area 5H as the hold display HH1 in FIG. Although reference numerals are omitted, FIGS. 55C to 55L described below all relate to variable display corresponding to the current display KH1.

  When the variable display of FIG. 55B is started (when the hold display HH1 is consumed), “PB′3-3” is used as the variable display variation pattern corresponding to the hold display HH1 (current display KH1). (Relief jackpot by developing from Normal B to Super A) is determined. That is, since the effect pattern such as hold is “HP5” and the variation pattern is “PB'3-3”, the display mode before reaching the current display KH1 is yellow (square) as shown in FIG. It becomes. Further, as will be sequentially described below, the display mode after reach is red (double circle), and the display mode after temporary shift is white → yellow → red → rainbow color.

  FIG. 55 (C) is a scene following FIG. 55 (B) and represents a scene immediately before reaching the left symbol “7” and the right symbol “7”. FIG. 55D shows a scene that follows the scene of FIG. 55C and is in a reach state of “7”. Since the display mode after the reach in the production pattern “HP5” such as the hold is red, as shown in FIG. 55D, the display mode of the current display KH1 is red (double circle).

  FIG. 55 (E) is a scene following FIG. 55 (D), and represents a scene developed into super reach. In FIG. 55E, the decorative design is enlarged and the background image is switched from the normal background image (background image up to FIG. 55D) to the special background image (the cherry pattern background image in the drawing). The enlarged display of the decorative pattern and the special background image allow the player to recognize that he is in super reach.

  FIG. 55 (F) is a scene following FIG. 55 (E), and represents a scene in which decorative symbols (“7”, “6”, “7”) that are not jackpot combinations are displayed temporarily. The display mode of the temporary stop display is different from the display mode of the stop display of the final stop symbol. In other words, the stop display of the final stop symbol is completely stopped, but is not completely stopped in the temporary stop display mode (not shown in FIG. 55F, but slightly vibrates, for example). In the temporary stop display, at least one of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may not be completely stopped and displayed (for example, all of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol may not be completely stopped and displayed. Then, it is not necessary to completely stop and display only the middle symbols to be variably displayed again). Note that FIGS. 55G to 55J are also temporarily stopped (the illustration of the state of slight vibration, etc. is omitted as in FIG. 55F).

  FIG. 55 (F) shows a temporary break (decorative stop display of decorative symbols) due to the fluctuation pattern “PB′3-3 (development from normal B to super A and relief jackpot)”, but FIG. 55 (F ) Except that the decorative symbol is not completely stopped and displayed, the same or substantially the same display as that of the fixed decorative symbol based on the variation pattern “PA'3-1 (development from normal B to super A)”. It is an aspect. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to easily distinguish between the temporary deviation and the stop display of the confirmed decorative symbol, and it is difficult to easily recognize that the display in FIG. 55 (F) is temporary deviation. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to the big hit later. For some players (for example, a player who is familiar with the gaming machine 1, a careful player, etc.), it may be possible to distinguish the temporary disparity and the stop display of the confirmed decorative pattern relatively easily. Thereby, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 55 (G) is a scene following FIG. 55 (F), in which the enlarged display of the decorative design is canceled (the decorative design returns to the size of the variable display start), and the background image changes from the special background image to the normal background image. It represents a scene that was switched to. In addition, although the first display mode after the temporary shift is white, the current display KH1 is white (circle) in FIG. 55 (G). In FIG. 55 (G), the display pattern shown in FIG. 55 (G) (display mode following FIG. 55 (H)) and the display pattern shown in FIG. The display mode shown (the display mode before the next change is started) is the same or substantially the same display mode. Thereby, it is possible to give a surprise to the big hit later. For some of the above players, the display mode shown in FIG. 55 (G) may be relatively easily distinguished from the display mode shown in FIG. 55 (A). Thereby, a sense of superiority can be given to some players.

  FIG. 55 (H) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (G). FIG. 55 (H) again shows a scene in which the temporarily stopped display of the decorative design is displayed. FIG. 55 (I) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (H). The second display mode after provisional deviation is yellow, but the current display KH1 is yellow (square) in FIG. 55 (I). FIG. 55 (J) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (I). The third display mode after provisional deviation is red, but the current display KH1 is red (double circle) in FIG. 55 (J). FIG. 55 (K) shows a scene following FIG. 55 (J). In FIG. 55 (K), the middle symbol variable display is started again. Further, the fourth display mode after the temporary shift is iridescent, but the current display KH1 is iridescent (star) in FIG. 55 (K). FIG. 55 (L) shows a scene in which the confirmed decorative symbols (“7”, “7”, “7”), which are jackpot combinations, are stopped and displayed.

  In the display operation example of FIG. 55, the enlarged display of the decorative design is once canceled after the temporary shift (see FIG. 55G), but the enlarged display of the decorative design need not be canceled once after the temporary shift. . For example, instead of changing from FIG. 55 (F) → FIG. 55 (G) → FIG. 55 (H), it may change from FIG. 55 (F) → FIG. 55 (H). Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 55, after temporarily dismissing the enlarged display of the decorative symbol after the temporary deviation, the enlarged symbol is displayed again (see FIGS. 55 (G) and 55 (H)). Once the enlarged display is canceled, the enlarged display may not be displayed again.

  Further, in the display operation example of FIG. 55, after the background image is temporarily switched from the special background image to the normal background image after the temporary shift, the special background image is not switched again (FIGS. 55G and 55H). For example, after temporarily shifting the background image from the special background image to the normal background image, the background image may be switched again from the normal background image to the special background image.

  In addition, when the current display changes after the temporary deviation, it may be suggested that the current display changes. For example, an effect of illuminating the current display with a spotlight may be executed before the current display changes.

  In addition, according to the display operation example of FIG. 55, the display pattern of hold, etc. is “HP8” (the display mode of the hold display is red, the display mode of the current display (before reach) is red, and the display mode of the current display (reach) If the variation pattern is either “PB'3-3” or “PB'3-4”, the current display is the rainbow color after reach. At the same time, a change (white → yellow → red → rainbow) is made after the temporary shift, but if the color becomes rainbow after reach, the change after the temporary shift may not be performed. Specifically, for example, when the display pattern such as the hold is “HP8” and the variation pattern is “PB′3-3” or “PB′3-4”, the display after reach is displayed. As an aspect, red may be set instead of the rainbow color (that is, the current display is red before reaching, red after reaching, and white → yellow → red → rainbow after temporarily shifting).

  As described above, according to the second modification, the gaming machine 1 is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player, and the specific display means is , Display a specific display (for example, current display etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state (for example, jackpot expected degree) by the display mode (for example, display the current display in the current display area 5K), An informing means (for example, a confirmed decoration symbol or the like, or an effect control CPU 101 for displaying a confirmed decoration symbol or the like) for notifying whether or not it is controlled to an advantageous state is provided, and one variable display execution period (FIG. 55 ( B) to a period (such as a period shown in FIG. 55 (L)), a predetermined notification that the control is not controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, notification of temporary deviation using a decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 55 (F)) is performed. Specific display after (For example, as shown in FIGS. 55 (H) to 55 (K), the display mode of this time display is white (circle) → yellow (square) → red (double circle) → rainbow (star)). Change) and a specific notification to the effect that it is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, notification of a big hit with a confirmed decorative pattern as shown in FIG. 55L) is performed. Thereby, an unexpected property can be given and an interest can be improved.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the display mode of the current display may be less likely to change after the provisional deviation notification than before the reach.

  Further, in the gaming machine 1, the display mode of the current display may be less likely to change after the provisional deviation notification than after the reach.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols and production symbols “1” to “9” are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown. It cannot be caught. For example, the symbol that is variably displayed and the symbol that is derived and displayed are not necessarily the same, and a symbol that is different from the symbol that is variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be executed using only one type of symbols. In this case, for example, variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking one kind of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed last, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed last. It may be a thing.

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not the game is a big hit and determines whether or not the variation pattern type is winning (pre-reading determination), and shows a command (symbol designation command) indicating the winning determination result. , A variation category command) is transmitted, and the pre-run announcement effect is executed on the effect control microcomputer 100 side based on the command indicating the determination result at the time of winning. However, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. Further, it may be configured such that determination at the time of winning (pre-reading determination) is performed on the production control microcomputer 100 side. In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command for designating only the values of the jackpot determination random number (random R) and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted at the time of starting winning. In addition, the presentation control microcomputer 100 side may be configured to make a winning determination (pre-reading determination) based on random number values specified by these commands.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, it is possible to shift to the probability change state based on the type of jackpot that has occurred, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a specific area through which a game ball can pass is provided in the big winning opening, and when the game ball passes through the specific area during a big hit, the game moves to a probable change state, while the specific area is played during the big hit. It is also possible to shift to the normal state when does not pass. In that case, substantial probability variation big hit and non-probability big hit may be realized by changing the ease of passing of the game ball to the specific area according to the big hit type. For example, the easiness of passage of the game ball to the specific area may be changed by changing the opening time of the big winning opening according to the big hit type. Specifically, a big hit type with a long opening time of the big winning opening is set as a big hit (substantial probable big hit) that allows a game ball to easily pass to a specific area, and a big hit type with a short opening time of the big winning opening is set to a specific area. It is good also as a big hit (substantial non-probable big hit) that a sphere does not easily pass.

  In addition, about embodiment mentioned above, although the game machine (what is called a 1st type game machine) which transfers to a jackpot game state based on the variable display result of a special symbol and an effect design was demonstrated, the variable provided in the game area | region was demonstrated. A gaming machine (so-called second type gaming machine) that shifts to a big hit gaming state based on the winning of a gaming ball (V winning) in a specific winning opening (V winning opening) in a winning ball apparatus (so-called role) It is good also as applying in the game machine which combined 1st type and 2nd type.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of the pseudo-ream, etc., 1 is used when the change is started. Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control microcomputer 100 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-ream, a slip effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach is not reach, so-called first) You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in variable display based on the variable time derived from the combination of two commands. The game control microcomputer 560 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. It may be. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be appropriately changed. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, the production control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as the boards on which the circuit for controlling the production apparatus is mounted. You may mount on one board | substrate. Further, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 and the like is mounted and a circuit for controlling other effect devices (lamps, LEDs, speakers 27, etc.) are mounted. You may make it provide two board | substrates with two production | presentation control boards.

  In the above embodiment, “the ratios are different” is not limited to those having different ratios such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, This is a concept including a ratio that is different in a relationship of A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

  In the above-described embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits a command to the effect control microcomputer 100. However, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits another command (for example, FIG. 3). The sound output board 70 and the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 5 or the sound / lamp board having the function of the circuit mounted on the sound output board 70 and the function of the circuit mounted on the lamp driver board 35). A control command may be transmitted and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100 on the effect control board 80 via another board. In that case, the command may simply pass through another board, or the sound output board 70, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound / lamp board are equipped with control means such as a microcomputer, and the control means receives the command. In response to this, control related to sound control and lamp control is executed, and the received command is changed as it is or, for example, to a simplified command to control the effect display device 9. You may make it transmit to. Even in that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 performs the display control in accordance with the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above-described embodiment. Display control can be performed in accordance with commands received from the board 35 or the sound / lamp board.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a gaming machine. However, according to the present invention, a predetermined number of bets are set when a medal is inserted, and a plurality of types are set according to the operation of the operation lever by the player. When the symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped according to the stop button operation by the player, if the combination of the stop symbol becomes a specific symbol combination, it applies to a slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player It is also possible.

  In the above embodiment, the game machine uses a game medium as an example, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media, and a game ball The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses game media such as the above and gives a score when a prize granting condition is satisfied.

  The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there is a change or addition within a range not departing from the gist of the present invention.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned form and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the above description and the descriptions below, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

As other gaming machines of the present invention, a gaming machine capable of executing variable display (for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 91 shown in FIG. 56, etc.)
Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the effect display device 9 shown in FIG. 1, the image display device 95 shown in FIG. 56, etc.);
The specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, the hold display, active display, etc. described in FIG. 49) is at least a normal mode (for example, the hold display, active display, etc. displayed in white, shown in FIG. A first specific mode (for example, a hold display or an active display displayed in red as shown in FIG. 49) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode (for example, a production suggestion display) that suggests the content of the production Specific display means (for example, the production control microcomputer 100) that can be displayed in any display mode including modes (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-continuous suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode, etc.) 32, steps S662, S662a shown in FIG. 32, steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726 shown in FIG. It refers to such portions for performing the steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714 described.) And,
Production executing means capable of executing the production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, in the production control microcomputer 100, according to the process table selected in step S8004 shown in FIG. 43, FIG. Step S8006 described in FIG. 47, a portion capable of executing special zone effects, pseudo-ream effects, and super reach effects by executing Step S8105 described in FIG. 47),
Image generation means capable of generating in real time an image of the virtual space in which the object is arranged (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for executing virtual space display processing in step S9161 of FIG. 60);
Moving means capable of moving the field of view in the virtual space (for example, an effect control CPU 9120 for setting a viewpoint and a visual axis in step S9345 shown in FIG. 60);
Preliminary effect control means (for example, step S9207 shown in FIG. 61 executes the prior effect control process) that can execute a notice effect using specific image data (for example, an advance effect, a notification effect, a result notification effect, etc.). 67, for example, an effect control CPU 9120 that performs control in steps S9423 and S9425 described in 67.
Based on execution of the notice effect, the field of view moved by the moving means is set as a specific field of view in the virtual space (for example, the viewpoint PT0 and the visual axis DV0 are set in step S9323 in FIG. 63). ), The display is switched to the display using the specific image data (for example, as shown in FIG. Display control by the described step S9333),
The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then executes the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, the content of the suggested content is displayed). The display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, the production control microcomputer 100 performs steps S4702 and S4705 shown in FIG. 47). , S4708, S4711, and S4714, if any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode that is the second display mode or A game machine characterized in that the active display can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). According to such a configuration, a sense of expectation for the specific mode can be enhanced.

  In addition, after setting the period of execution of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode and the visual field moved by the moving means as the specific visual field of the virtual space, the visual field is arranged in the virtual space The period for switching to the display using the specific image data may overlap with the movement of the specific object. If it does in this way, the interest of a game can be raised synergistically by both productions.

  In addition, after the display mode of the specific display is displayed in the second specific mode, the field of view moved by the moving unit is set as the specific field of view of the virtual space, and then the movement with respect to the specific object arranged in the virtual space The display may be switched to display using the specific image data. In this way, by displaying the specific display in the second specific mode, it is possible to give the player a degree of expectation that the display using the specific image data may be executed.

  In addition, after setting the field of view moved by the moving unit to the specific field of view of the virtual space, the display is switched to the display using the specific image data in accordance with the movement with respect to the specific object arranged in the virtual space. The display mode of the specific display may be changed to the second specific mode. In this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the display using the specific image data may change the display mode of the specific display to the second specific mode.

  In addition, as an effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode, after setting the field of view moved by the moving means as the specific field of view of the virtual space, the movement to the specific object arranged in the virtual space Accordingly, the display may be switched to the display using the specific image data. In this way, it is possible to produce a highly expressive presentation using an image of the virtual space in which the object is arranged, so that it is possible to play an expectation that the specific display mode may change to the second specific mode. Can be given to the player.

  Furthermore, as an example of the form of the gaming machine that suppresses the uncomfortable feeling given to the player by switching the display, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player Display means capable of displaying an image (for example, the image display device 5) and image generation means capable of generating an image of the virtual space in which the object is arranged in real time (for example, virtual space display in step S161) Effect control CPU 120 for executing processing), moving means capable of moving the field of view in the virtual space (for example, effect control CPU 120 for setting the viewpoint and visual axis in step S345), and specific image data are used. A notice effect means (for example, step S) capable of executing a notice effect (eg, advance effect, notification effect, result notification effect, etc.) The visual field moved by the moving means based on the fact that the preliminary announcement control is executed, and the preliminary presentation control process is executed at 07 and the preliminary control is executed at steps S423 and S425. Is set to the specific field of view in the virtual space (for example, the viewpoint PT0 and the visual axis DV0 are set in step S323) and then moved with respect to the specific object arranged in the virtual space (for example, zoomed in by steps S326 and S328). A gaming machine that switches to display using the specific image data (for example, display control in step S333) can be used. Below, an example of the form example of this gaming machine will be described as another form example.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, another embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 91 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 92 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 93 that supports and fixes the gaming board 92. On the game board 92, a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails is formed. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  At predetermined positions of the game board 92 such as inside or outside of the game area, a first special symbol display device 94A, a second special symbol display device 94B, an image display device 95, a normal winning ball device 96A, a normal variable winning ball device 96B, A special variable winning ball device 97, a normal symbol display 920, a first hold display 925A, a second hold display 925B, a general hold display 925C, a passing gate 941 and the like are provided. Speakers 98L and 98R capable of reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 93, and a game effect lamp 99 is provided around the game area. In the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 93, a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. The resilience of the game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount (rotation amount). A predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 93 below the gaming area is provided with an upper plate (batting ball supply tray) that holds (stores) game balls and a lower plate that holds (stores) extra balls from the upper plate. It has been. A stick controller 931A is attached to the member forming the lower plate, and a push button 931B is provided to the member forming the upper plate.

  On the screens of the first special symbol display device 94A, the second special symbol display device 94B, the image display device 95, etc., special symbols and decorative symbols are variably displayed. These variable displays can be executed based on the occurrence of the start winning. The start prize includes a first start prize and a second start prize. The first start winning is generated when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening formed in the normal winning ball device 96A. The second start winning is generated when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 96B. Each of the first special symbol display device 94A and the second special symbol display device 94B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). A special symbol (also referred to as “special symbol”) that is special identification information) is displayed variably (variably displayed). The image display device 95 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 95, a special symbol (also referred to as “first special symbol”) by the first special symbol display device 94A in the special symbol game or a special symbol (“first” by the second special symbol display device 94B). Corresponding to each of the variable display (also referred to as “2 special figure”), a decorative symbol as identification information (decorative identification information) is variably displayed in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display portions such as three. The This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  On the screen of the image display device 95 shown in FIG. 56, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R are arranged as a plurality of variable display portions. In response to the start of one of the variation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 94A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 94B as the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a display result of variable display in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R on the image display device 95 Then, the finalized design symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result of the variable display of the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed. The display result in the variable display of special symbols and decorative designs is also referred to as a variable display result. In particular, a special symbol variable display result in a special figure game is also referred to as a special figure display result. As described above, on the screen of the image display device 95, the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 94A or the special special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 94B. In synchronism with the figure game, variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified is performed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. .

  The decorative symbol may be variably displayed as a plurality of types of identification information, and an arbitrary effect image can be displayed on the screen of the image display device 95 corresponding to the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol game. It may be what. For example, on the screen of the image display device 95, it may be possible to execute an effect of displaying the result of a story corresponding to a variable symbol display result of a special symbol, etc. by displaying an effect image having a story characteristic. As an effect by displaying the effect image, for example, a battle effect in which a wrestling or soccer game or an enemy ally character fights may be performed. When the variable display result is “losing”, an effect of defeating the game or battle is performed. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, an effect of winning the game or battle is performed. Alternatively, for example, on the screen of the image display device 95, the display color change display and the stop display in a specific display region are repeated. And when the variable display result is “losing”, by maintaining the state where the predetermined display color (for example, white) is stopped and displayed, or by maintaining the predetermined display color in a non-display state, Derived and displayed decorative symbols. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the decorative design is derived and displayed by maintaining the state where the display is stopped with a display color (for example, red) different from the predetermined display color. In this way, during the variable display of decorative symbols, a predetermined (single) symbol may be switched between display and non-display, while other symbols may be maintained in a non-display state. Then, any of a plurality of types of symbols may be derived and displayed (final stop display) as the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) that is a variable display result of the ornament symbol. In addition, during the variable display of the decorative design, display and non-display of the effect image showing the predetermined design may be repeated so that other effect images are not displayed. As a result of the variable display of decorative symbols, the effect image indicating the predetermined symbol used for variable display is not stopped and displayed, and an effect image indicating a specific number or symbol different from the predetermined symbol is displayed. By displaying, a decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  On the screen of the image display device 95, in addition to the decorative symbol display area, a hold display portion 95H is arranged. In the hold display section 95H, a hold display corresponding to the variable display that can be executed based on the occurrence of the start winning is performed. The variable display start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) is satisfied due to the start winning, but the variable display based on the previously established start condition is being executed and the pachinko gaming machine 91 is controlled to the big hit gaming state. For example, when the start condition that allows the start of variable display is not satisfied, variable display corresponding to the satisfied start condition is suspended. The variable display hold count is also referred to as a hold storage count. The variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 94A is also referred to as the first special figure holding memory number. The variable display holding number corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 94B is also referred to as a second special figure holding memory number.

  Due to the occurrence of the first start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the first start winning opening, the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 94A is established. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established when the first start condition is established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one ( Incremented), the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. Due to the occurrence of the second start winning when the game ball passes (enters) through the second start winning opening, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 94B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not established when the second start condition is established, the second special figure holding storage number is incremented by one ( Incremented), execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. When the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding storage number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and when the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started Then, the second special figure holding memory number is decremented by one (decrement). If the first special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the first start prize is generated, the first start condition is not satisfied, and the special figure based on the start prize is obtained. The game may be invalidated and only the prize balls may be paid out. If the second special figure holding storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”) when the second start winning is generated, the second starting condition is not satisfied, and the special figure based on the start winning is obtained. The game may be invalidated and only the prize balls may be paid out.

  The normal winning ball device 96 </ b> A and the normal variable winning ball device 96 </ b> B are provided below the image display device 95. The normal winning ball device 96A forms a first starting winning port as a first starting region, and the normal variable winning device 96B forms a second starting winning port as a second starting region. The normal variable winning ball device 96B is an electric tulip type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 981 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory). As an example, in the normal variable winning ball device 96B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 981 for the normal electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball passes (enters) through the second starting winning hole. Do not close. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 96B, when the solenoid 981 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning hole. ) Make it open. The normal variable winning ball device 96B is normally opened when the solenoid 981 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter (pass) through the second start winning port, while the expansion when the solenoid 981 is in the on state. You may comprise so that a game ball may enter (pass) more easily than an open state. As described above, the normal variable winning ball device 96B has a first variable state such as an open state or an enlarged open state in which the game ball can pass (enter) through the second start winning port, and a game ball cannot pass (enter). It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state such as a closed state or a normally open state that is difficult to pass (enter).

  The game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 96A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 922A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 96B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 922B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 922A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first reserved memory number is a predetermined upper limit value. If it is less than (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 922B, if a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as award balls and the second reserved memory number is equal to or less than a predetermined upper limit value, The second start condition is satisfied.

  The special variable winning ball device 97 is provided below the normal winning ball device 96A and the normal variable winning ball device 96B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 97 forms a large winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. The special variable winning ball apparatus 97 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 982 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 97, when the solenoid 982 for the big prize opening door is in the OFF state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening, and the game ball passes (enters) the big winning opening. become unable. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 97, when the solenoid 982 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big winning opening door opens the big winning opening and the game ball passes through the big winning opening (entrance). ). In this way, the special winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball easily passes (enters) and is advantageous to the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot pass (enters) and is disadvantageous to the player To do. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot pass (enter) through the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball hardly passes (enters) through the big prize port may be provided.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) through the big winning opening is detected by, for example, a count switch 923 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the count switch 923, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 97, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 97 is opened, the game ball can enter the special prize opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 97 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 97, it becomes impossible or difficult for the player to get a prize ball by passing (entering) the game ball to the special prize winning opening. This is a disadvantageous second state.

  The normal symbol display 920 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 92, for example, on the left side of the game area shown in FIG. The normal symbol display 920 is configured using a light emitting member or a display member similar to the first special symbol display device 94A and the second special symbol display device 94B, such as a 7-segment or dot matrix LED or a small liquid crystal display device. It only has to be done. The normal symbol display 920 is a display capable of executing variable display of normal symbols. In the variable display of the normal symbol, normal symbols (also referred to as “ordinary symbols” or “ordinary symbols”), which are identification information of a plurality of types or a single type different from the special symbols, are displayed variably. Such variable display of normal symbols is also referred to as a general game (or “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 920, a general symbol hold display 925C is provided. The general-purpose hold display unit 925C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays a general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the pass gate 941.

  In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 92 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  The stick controller 931A provided in the central portion of the lower plate is configured so that the player can hold it and perform a tilting operation and the like. The stick controller 931A includes an operation rod that can be held and tilted by the player, and the player has a predetermined position of the operation rod (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod). Is provided with a trigger button that can be pushed and pulled with an index finger or the like. The player's operation using the stick controller 931A is detected by, for example, a controller sensor unit 935A shown in FIG. As an example, the controller sensor unit 935A includes a tilt direction sensor and a trigger sensor. The tilt direction sensor detects the tilt direction of the operating rod. The trigger sensor detects whether the trigger button is pushed or pulled. As described above, the controller sensor unit 935A can detect the player's operation using the stick controller 931A, such as a tilting operation using the operating rod and a push-pull operation using the trigger button.

  A push button 931B provided on an upper plate or the like above the stick controller 931A is configured to be pressed by a player. The player's operation using the push button 931B is detected by, for example, a push sensor 935B shown in FIG. That is, the push sensor 935B can detect a player's operation using the push button 931B, such as a pressing operation on the push button 931B.

  The pachinko gaming machine 91 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 911, an effect control board 912, a sound control board 913, and a lamp control board 914 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 91 is also equipped with a relay board 915 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 911 and the effect control board 912. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are disposed on the back surface of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 91.

  The main board 911 is a control board on the main side, and various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 91 are mounted. For example, a game control microcomputer 9100, a switch circuit 9110, a solenoid circuit 9111, and the like are mounted on the main board 911. The switch circuit 9110 takes in detection signals from various switches for detecting game balls and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 9100. The solenoid circuit 9111 transmits a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 9100 to the solenoid 981 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 982 for the big prize opening door.

  The effect control board 912 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 911, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 911 via the relay board 915, and receives the image display device 95 and the speakers 98L and 98R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 99 and other decoration LEDs are mounted. The audio control board 913 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 912, and outputs audio from the speakers 98L and 98R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 912. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 914 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 912, and based on commands and control data from the effect control board 912, the game effect lamp 99 and other decorations A lamp driver circuit for supplying a driving current to the LED or the like is mounted.

  The main board 911 has wiring for transmitting detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 921, a start port switch (first start port switch 922A and second start port switch 922B), and a count switch 923 as shown in FIG. Is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. The main board 911 includes a first special symbol display device 94A, a second special symbol display device 94B, a normal symbol display device 920, a first hold display device 925A, a second hold display device 925B, and a general drawing hold display device 925C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control command, which is an example of command information, is output and transmitted as a control signal from the main board 911 to a sub-side control board including the effect control board 912 and the like. A control signal transmitted from the main board 911 toward the effect control board 912 is relayed by the relay board 915. The control command transmitted from the main board 911 to the effect control board 912 via the relay board 915 is an effect control command transmitted / received as an electric signal, for example. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 95, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 98L and 98R, a game effect lamp 99, and the like. A lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like is included. Each of these effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  A game control microcomputer 9100 mounted on the main board 911 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 9101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 9102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 9103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 9103 A random number circuit 9104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 9105 are provided. The ROM 9101 only needs to be configured as a nonvolatile, read-only semiconductor memory that cannot be written or rewritten. Alternatively, the ROM 9101 is configured as a nonvolatile read-only semiconductor memory that can be electrically erased, written, or rewritten, such as an EEPROM (Electronically Erasable and Programmable ROM) or a NAND flash ROM. Also good.

  In the game control microcomputer 9100, the CPU 9103 executes a game control program read from the ROM 9101, thereby executing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 91. At this time, the CPU 9103 reads fixed data from the ROM 9101, the CPU 9103 writes various data to the RAM 9102 and temporarily stores the data, and the CPU 9103 stores various data temporarily stored in the RAM 9102. The CPU 9103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 9100 via the I / O 9105, and the CPU 9103 takes the outside of the game control microcomputer 9100 via the I / O 9105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The random number circuit 9104 may be any circuit that counts numerical data indicating some or all of the various random numbers used to control the progress of the game. Note that a one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 9100 only needs to incorporate at least the RAM 9102 in addition to the CPU 9103, and the ROM 9101, the random number circuit 9104, the I / O 9105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 9100, for example, a random number circuit 9104 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random numbers may be partially or wholly updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 9104, or the game random numbers may be updated by software by the CPU 9103 of the game control microcomputer 9100 executing a predetermined computer program. Some or all of them may be updated. For example, the random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the RAM 9102 in the game control microcomputer 9100 or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 9102 indicates a predetermined random number value. The numerical value may be stored, and the CPU 9103 may update the stored value regularly or irregularly so that the random value is updated.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 9101 provided in the game control microcomputer 9100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 9101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 9103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. In addition, the ROM 9101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 9103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 911 and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are stored. In the RAM 9102 provided in the game control microcomputer 9100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 91 and the like are temporarily stored so as to be rewritable.

  The effect control board 912 includes an effect control CPU 9120 that performs a control operation in accordance with an effect control program, a ROM 9121 that stores an effect control program and fixed data, and a RAM 9122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 9120. A display control unit 9123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 95, and a random number circuit 9124 that updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the effect control CPU 9120. And I / O 9125 are mounted. The effect control CPU 9120, ROM 9121, and RAM 9122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 912. On the effect control board 912, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 95, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 913, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 914. Further, on the effect control board 912, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 931A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 935A, and a game for the push button 931B. Wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the user's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 935B is also connected.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, a random counter for effects provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 counts numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation in an updatable manner. . The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. As an example, on the side of the effect control board 12, it is possible to count numerical data indicating random values for determining various effects such as a random number for determining a stop symbol in a variable display of decorative symbols, and a random value for determining a notice effect. Controlled.

  The ROM 9121 mounted on the effect control board 912 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation, in addition to the effect control program. For example, the ROM 9121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 9120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination table, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern includes, for example, effect control execution data (control data such as display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data) associated with the effect control process timer determination value, an end code, and the like. Consists of process data. The RAM 9122 mounted on the effect control board 912 stores various data used for controlling the effect operation.

  The display control unit 9123 mounted on the effect control board 912 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 95 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 9120. For example, the display control unit 9123 performs control for executing variable display of decorative symbols and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 95. As an example, the display control unit 9123 may include an image data memory such as a VDP (Video Display Processor) and a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), a frame buffer, an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a graphics processing unit (GPU), a graphics controller LSI (GCL), or a microprocessor for image processing, more commonly referred to as a digital signal processor (DSP). The image data memory may be a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be anything configured using.

  A VDP provided in the display control unit 9123 is an image processor having an image data processing function. The image data processing function by VDP may include, for example, a high-speed drawing function and a moving image decoding function for displaying various images on the screen of the image display device 95. In the VDP of the display control unit 9123, various image data processing such as predetermined matrix calculation (vector calculation) is executed in accordance with a display control command from the effect control CPU 9120. The VDP of the display control unit 9123 may include a geometry processor and a drawing processor. The geometry processor performs geometry processing such as coordinate transformation, perspective transformation, light source calculation, and basic figure generation. The drawing processor performs drawing (rendering) processing of an object composed of a plurality of polygons.

  The image data memory provided in the display control unit 9123 stores various image data (image element data) used for image display in the image display device 95 in advance. The image data stored in the image data memory only needs to include a plurality of types of image element data corresponding to a plurality of types of effect images, such as a plurality of types of decorative designs that are variably displayed on the image display device 95. The image element data may be configured in a bitmap format or a vector format. The image element data in the bitmap format is mainly used for displaying a planar image or displaying a texture of an object (three-dimensional shape model), and only needs to include color information (RGB value, etc.) for each pixel. Vector format image element data can be used to display objects (three-dimensional shape models) placed in virtual space (virtual three-dimensional space), such as points, lines, polygons, polyhedrons including cubes and cuboids, spheres, etc. It is only necessary to represent the wire frame. In the display control unit 9123, the image element data read from the image data memory is temporarily stored in the VRAM, and is provided so as to be usable in a drawing process by VDP. The display data of the effect image created by the drawing process or the like is developed and stored in the frame buffer of the display control unit 9123. The display data for the effect image may be gradation data (color signal data) of each pixel constituting the display area of the image display device 95. By supplying the display data read from the frame buffer to the LCD drive circuit, generating a scanning signal together with a color signal corresponding to the gradation data (color signal data), and outputting it to the image display device 95, Various images may be displayed in the display area of the image display device 95.

  An object (three-dimensional shape model) is composed of morphological information indicating a three-dimensional geometric form such as position, posture, outline, pattern, color, etc. as a display target that can be visually recognized by humans. It can be expressed by computer graphics projected onto a dimensional plane (projection plane). The virtual space is a virtual space generated using a computer as a space in which coordinates of a three-dimensional coordinate system used for expressing the arrangement of objects and virtual cameras can be designated. The virtual camera makes it possible to specify a range in which an object arranged in a virtual space is projected onto a two-dimensional plane (projection plane). The range in which the object is projected becomes a field of view (field-of-view range) in the virtual space, and can be determined using the position of the virtual camera and the line-of-sight direction in the virtual space. The position of the virtual camera in the virtual space is called a viewpoint. The line-of-sight direction of the virtual camera in the virtual space is referred to as the visual axis. In addition to the viewpoint and the visual axis, the visual field in the virtual space may be determined by using the tilt of the virtual camera, the enlargement / reduction ratio, the viewing angle (view angle), the aspect (the aspect ratio of the display screen), and the like. Unlike a case where a two-dimensional plane image is prepared in advance, the virtual space image is set so that an object or a virtual camera arranged in the three-dimensional space can be changed over time, and the two-dimensional plane (projection plane) ) Is generated so as to render the image projected in real time so that it can be displayed in real time.

  An I / O 9125 mounted on the effect control board 912 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 911 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 912. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 9125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 95, a command transmitted to the audio control board 913 (sound effect signal), or a command transmitted to the lamp control board 914 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 91, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is fired based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hit ball operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 91. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area passes (enters) the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the first start opening switch 922A shown in FIG. The first start condition is satisfied due to the detection. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 94A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, because the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state has ended. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 96B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 922B shown in FIG. Therefore, the second start condition is established. Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 94B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied by, for example, the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normal variable winning ball device 96B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the second start winning port.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 941 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 57, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable symbol display on the normal symbol display 920 is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 920 is started by the normal symbol display device 920 based on the fact that the general symbol start condition for starting variable symbol variable display, such as the end of the previous normal symbol game, is satisfied. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 96B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed.

  When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 94A is started or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 94B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and an effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is a game control microcomputer 9100 on the main board 11 shown in FIG. To the effect control board 12.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 94A and the second special symbol display device 94B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 95 In the symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R, variable display of decorative symbols (effect symbols) different from the special symbols is performed. The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R are also referred to as a left symbol, a middle symbol, and a right symbol, respectively. In the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 94A and the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 94B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 95.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), which is an advantageous state advantageous to the player. The big hit gaming state as the specific gaming state is controlled. That is, whether or not the game state is controlled to the big hit game state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variable display result is determined (predetermined) when the special figure game is started, whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state is also determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. The When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost” (non-specific display result).

  When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 94A or the second special symbol display device 94B and the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined in advance in the display area of the image display device 95. The finalized decorative symbol that is the winning combination is derived and displayed. As an example, if the same decorative design is stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative design display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R, the jackpot combination is confirmed. It is only necessary that the decorative design is derived and displayed.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball device 97 is in a first state that is advantageous to the player. Then, a period until a predetermined opening upper limit time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 0.1 second) elapses, or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the big winning opening and a winning ball is generated. In the period up to, a round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is performed in which the big prize opening is continuously opened. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 923, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “2” or “15”) is reached.

  When the variable display result is “big hit”, it is only necessary to include the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. As a round game in the big hit game state, the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball apparatus 97 is in the first state (the big winning opening is opened) advantageous for the player is relatively long (for example, 29.5 seconds). A normal open round is executed. When the big hit type is “surprise”, as the round game in the big hit game state, the upper limit time for which the special variable winning ball device 97 is in the first state (open state of the big prize opening) is relatively short A short-term opening round (for example, 0.1 seconds) may be executed.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, based on the fact that a predetermined probability variation control condition is satisfied, the probability variation state included in the special game state is controlled among advantageous states advantageous to the player over the normal state. Sometimes. The probability that the variable display result will be a “big hit” in the probability variation state (big hit probability) is higher than that in the normal state. The probability variation state is also referred to as a high probability state because the probability of being controlled to the big hit gaming state is higher than the normal state. In contrast to the probability variation state, the normal state and the like are included in the low probability state. The probability change state is a predetermined probability change end condition such that the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 200 times) or the big hit gaming state is started before the variable display execution number reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until is established. The probability variation end condition may be satisfied when the next big hit gaming state is started regardless of the number of executions of variable display. After the big hit gaming state is ended, it may be controlled to a short time state included in the special gaming state and different from the probability changing state. When the time is short, the average variable display time is shorter than the normal state. The short-time state is a predetermined short-time end condition such that a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) of variable display is executed, or that a big hit gaming state is started before the number of executions of variable display reaches the predetermined number of times. It is controlled to continue until is established. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the gaming state becomes a short-time state. When the big hit type is “probability change”, after the big hit game state is ended, the game state becomes the probability change state.

  In the probability changing state or the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 96B is in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball easily passes (enters) the second start winning opening than the normal state. And a second variable state (closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 920 controls the normal symbol change time (the normal symbol change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each time the normal symbol game is “normal”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 96B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is improved as compared with that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The normal variable winning ball device 96B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling the length of the ball to be longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts than in the normal state. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. In this way, the control for changing the normal variable winning ball device 96B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “high base control”). The gaming state in which the high opening control is performed is also referred to as a high opening state (or an advantageous opening state). In contrast to the high open state, the normal state or the like is also referred to as a low open state (or a normal open state). By controlling to the probable change state or the short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a “big hit” is shortened, and a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is obtained. Even when the probability variation control is performed in the probability variation state, the high opening control may not be performed.

  In the image display device 95, the decorative symbol other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol) is stopped in a state in which it matches the jackpot combination continuously for a predetermined time. A big hit can occur before the final result is displayed due to rocking, scaling, or deformation, or when multiple decorative symbols fluctuate synchronously with the same symbol, or the display position changes. An effect performed in a state where the sex is continued (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach effect. As a reach effect, a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from a decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 95, a display mode of a background image is changed, and a moving image different from the decorative design An effect operation different from changing the variation pattern of the decorative design, such as reproducing and displaying an image, may be executed. Not only the display operation in the image display device 95 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 98L and 98R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 99, and the like are different from the operation modes before the reach mode. The operation mode may be included in the reach effect. The reach state and its state are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, variable display including reach production is called reach variable display. Then, if the display result of the symbols that are variably displayed on the screen of the image display device 95 is not a big hit combination, it is “lost”, and the variability display state ends.

  As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as reach patterns) having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as reliability or big hit reliability) varies depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, a normal reach production (normal reach) and a super reach production (super reach) are preset. When the reach effect in the super reach is executed, there is a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (expected degree of the big hit) than in the case where the reach effect in the normal reach is executed. In addition, the reach production that becomes the super reach may include a plurality of types of reach production including a super reach that executes a specific reach production in which the degree of expectation of the big hit is higher than other super reach.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach production, the variable display status of decorative designs may become reach status, and the variable display result may be a `` big hit '', etc. There may be a case where a variable display effect for informing the player is given in accordance with a variable display mode of decorative symbols. As an example, it is only necessary that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect can be executed during decorative display of the decorative design. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in response to the change pattern being determined on the main board 911 side.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, a finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result after the variable symbol display is started in response to the start condition of the special symbol game being satisfied once. After the temporary stop until the derivation is displayed, it is possible to perform the effect display for changing (pseudo-continuous change) again up to a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the initial variation from the start of variable symbol display until the first temporary stop for all decorative symbols. The number of times that the decorative symbol is re-variable in all of the areas 95L, 95C, and 95R may be used.

  During variable display of decorative patterns, unlike variable display effects such as reach effects or “pseudo-continuous”, for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, a message image or voice output is displayed. There is a possibility that the decorative display variable display state may reach a reach state due to an effect operation different from the symbol variable display operation, that a reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result is `` A notice effect may be executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility of being a “hit”.

  The display operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative pattern after variable display of the decorative pattern is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R. It is only necessary to be executed (started) before the emblem reaches the reach mode (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L and 95R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that there is a possibility that the variable display result may be a “hit” may include one that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display mode becomes the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be a big hit gaming state at a predetermined timing from the start of variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols until the fixed special symbols and fixed decorative symbols that result in variable display are derived. Anything that can give notice of sex is acceptable. A plurality of notice patterns are prepared in advance corresponding to the contents of the effect operation (effect mode) when such a notice effect is executed.

  The notice effect includes a pre-read notice effect (also referred to as a pre-read effect). The pre-reading notice effect indicates that the variable display result is “big hit” according to the production mode before the variable display that is subject to notice (the notice target) is the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit”. It is a notice effect that can be announced in advance. In particular, a pre-reading notice effect that continuously gives notice over a variable display of decorative symbols that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special drawing games is also referred to as a continuous notice effect. In the pre-reading notice effect, before the variable display subject to notice is started, for example, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” based on the reserved memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start winning prize, etc. The production operation is started. In contrast to the pre-reading notice effect, the notice effect that is executed after the variable display to be noticed is started is referred to as a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, a variable notice, or a variable indication notice effect). Is done.

  When the lost symbol is stopped and displayed (derived) on the first special symbol display device 94A or the second special symbol display device 94B and the variable display result is “lost”, the variable display mode is “non-reach” (“normal” A case where the variable display mode is “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”). When the variable display mode is “non-reach”, the variable display state of the decorative design is not reached after the variable display of the decorative design is started. Reach combination) is stopped (derived). When the variable display mode is “reach”, the reach presentation is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display is started, and finally the jackpot combination is A predetermined combination of decorative symbols (reach combination) that is not to be displayed is stopped (derived). The non-reach combination and the decorative symbols constituting the reach combination may be included in the non-specific display result together with the special symbol that becomes the lost symbol.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 91 in this embodiment will be described.

  In the main board 911, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 9100 is activated, and the CPU 9103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 9103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 9102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 9100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 9103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 9103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a loop process may be entered after executing a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 91 to the state at the previous power supply stop.

  When the CPU 9103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 9103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, game control process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in pachinko gaming machine 91 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included.

  The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 921, the first start port switch 922A, the second start port switch 922B, and the count switch 923 via the switch circuit 9110. The main-side error process is a process for making an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 91 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start-up information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 91, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 911 side by software.

  In the game control process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the game process flag provided in the RAM 9102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 91, and the first special symbol display device 94A or Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of display operation in the second special symbol display device 94B, setting of opening / closing operation of the big winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 97, etc. in a predetermined procedure. In the normal symbol process, the normal symbol display unit 920 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) to change the normal symbol variable display or to set the tilting operation of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball device 96B. It is a process that enables.

  The command control process is a process for transmitting a control command from the main board 911 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 912. As an example, in the command control process, the output control board 912 among the output ports included in the I / O 9105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 9102. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal, and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time and then turned off. Thus, it is possible to transmit the effect control command based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the game control process. In the game control process shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 9103 of the game control microcomputer 9100 first determines whether or not a start winning has occurred (step S911). When it is determined that a start winning has occurred (step S911; Yes), a winning random number is acquired (step S912). The random number at the time of winning only needs to include the random value MR1 for determining the variable display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern among the game random numbers. .

  Subsequent to step S912, an effect control command serving as a start winning command is transmitted (step S913). The start winning command only needs to include a start opening winning designation command and a pending storage count notification command. The start opening prize designation command is an effect control command for notifying that the occurrence of a start prize such as a first start prize or a second start prize can be specified. The reserved memory count notification command is an effect control command for notifying that the number of reserved memories such as the first special figure reserved memory count and the second special figure reserved memory count can be specified.

  When it is determined in step S911 that no start winning has occurred (step S911; No), after the command transmission in step S913 is performed, the value of the game process flag is determined (step S921). The game process flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area of the RAM 9102 (such as a game control flag setting unit), and one of values “0” to “3” is variably set according to the progress of the game control.

  If it is determined in step S921 that the value of the game process flag is “0” (step S921; “0”), it is determined whether variable display can be started (step S9101). In step S9101, it is determined that variable display can be started, for example, when the number of reserved storage is other than “0”. If it is determined that the variable display cannot be started (step S9101; No), the game control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display can be started (step S9101; Yes), the variable display result is determined (step S9102). In step S9102, the random display value for determining the variable display result and the variable display result determination table are used to determine whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” at a predetermined ratio. When the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 91 is a probable change state, the determined value in the variable display result determination table is such that the variable display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher rate than in the normal state or the short time state. It only has to be set. When it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit”, it is determined at a predetermined ratio whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”. Subsequently, an internal flag such as a big hit flag is set (step S9103). Next, after the value of the game process flag is updated to “1” (step S9104), the game control process process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S921 that the value of the game process flag is “1” (step S921; “1”), a variation pattern or the like is determined (step S9111). In step S9111, the ratio at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” corresponding to each fluctuation pattern by changing the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern depending on whether or not the variable display result is decided to be “big hit”. (Big hit expectation) can be varied.

  FIG. 59 shows a variation pattern in this other embodiment. In this example, among the cases where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “losing”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” which does not become the reach state, and the “reach” state where the reach state is reached. ], And a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance, corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special drawing display result) is “big hit”. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as a non-reach loss variation pattern), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display content is “reach” is This is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a reach loss variation pattern). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern may include a normal reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in normal reach is executed and a super reach variation pattern in which a reach effect in super reach is executed. Corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns as shown in FIG. 59, a special figure fluctuation time which is a variable symbol display time is determined in advance. Therefore, when variable display using the variation pattern determined in step S9111 is executed, special symbol display results are displayed after variable display such as special symbols is performed in the variable display period corresponding to the special diagram variation time. The variable display result is derived and displayed.

  Subsequent to step S9111 shown in FIG. 58, an effect control command serving as a variable display start command is transmitted (step S9112). The variable display start command only needs to include a change start command, a variable display result notification command, and a change pattern designation command. After the command transmission in step S9112, the game process flag is updated to “2” (step S9113), and the game control process process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S921 that the value of the game process flag is “2” (step S921; “2”), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (step S9121). If it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S9121; No), control for variably displaying special symbols or the like is performed (step S9122), and the game control process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9121 that the variable display time has elapsed (step S9121; Yes), control for stopping and displaying special symbols and the like is performed (step S9123). Subsequently, a variable display end command is transmitted (step S9124), and a gaming state at the end of variable display is set (step S9124A). In step S9124A, the time saving state in which the time saving control is performed is terminated when a predetermined time saving end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of executions of variable display reaches a predetermined time saving end determination value. Is set to control to the normal state. When the probability variation end condition is satisfied, a setting may be made to terminate the probability variation state in which the probability variation control is performed and to control the normal state. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” (step S9125). If it is “big hit” (step S9125; Yes), the value of the game process flag is updated to “3”. (Step S9126) If it is “losing” instead of “big hit” (Step S9125; No), the value of the game process flag is updated (initialized) to “0” (Step S9127), and the game control is performed. End process processing.

  If it is determined in step S921 that the value of the game process flag is “3” (step S921; “3”), it is determined whether or not the big hit game state is over (step S9131). ). When it is determined that the big hit is not finished (step S9131; No), the big hit control controlled to the big hit gaming state is performed (step S9132), and the game control process is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9131 that the big hit has ended (step S9131; Yes), the gaming state after the big hit ends is set (step S9133). In step S9133, for example, setting for starting the time-saving state in which the time-shortening control is performed, setting for starting the probability-changing state in which the probability-changing control is performed, and the like are performed according to the big hit type. Subsequent to step S9133, the value of the game process flag is updated (initialized) to “0” (step S9134), and the game control process is terminated.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 912 will be described. In the effect control board 912, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 9120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. In the effect control main process, the effect control is initially set by executing an initialization process or the like. Thereafter, every time a predetermined control interrupt time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses and a control control timer interrupt occurs, command analysis processing, effect control process processing, effect random number update processing, etc. Executed. When an interrupt for command reception occurs separately from the timer interrupt for effect control, a control signal serving as an effect control command transmitted from the main board 911 is taken in, for example, in a predetermined area (effect control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 9122. The effect control command is stored in a provided effect control command reception buffer or the like.

  As an example, in the command analysis process, when there is a reception command stored in the effect control command reception buffer, it is determined which effect control command is received by checking the MODE data of the received command. . Based on the determination result, settings and control corresponding to the received effect control command are performed. After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various operations such as an effect image display operation on the screen of the image display device 95, an audio output operation from the speakers 98L and 98R, and a lighting operation in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 99 and the decoration LED are performed. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the rendering device, determination, determination, setting, etc. according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 911 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is executed, and numerical data indicating effect random numbers counted by a random counter in the RAM 9122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control.

  FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 60, after the virtual space display process (step S9161) is executed, the effect control is performed according to the value of the effect process flag stored in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 9122. A process selected from a plurality of processes described in advance in the computer program is executed. The processing executed in accordance with the value of the effect process flag includes variable display start waiting processing (step S 9170), variable display start setting processing (step S 9171), variable display effect processing (step S 9172), and wait processing per special figure. (Step S9173), an attacker opening effect process (Step S9174), and an ending effect process (Step S9175) are included.

  The virtual space display process in step S9161 is a process for enabling real-time generation of an image of a virtual space in which objects prepared in advance are arranged. On the screen of the image display device 95, a virtual space display in a predetermined mode is performed. As an example of virtual space display, an image obtained by capturing a virtual space where a concert stage is arranged with a virtual camera may be displayed. In the virtual space, the virtual camera can move in a predetermined pattern, and an image corresponding to the position of the virtual camera may be generated in real time and displayed on the screen of the image display device 95.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S 9170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process performs variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 95 based on whether the first variation start command or the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 911 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. The first variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 94A is started. The second variation start command is an effect control command for notifying that the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 94B is started. When either the first change start command or the second change start command is received, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”.

  The variable display start setting process in step S 9171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process is performed on the screen of the image display device 95 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 94A or the second special symbol display device 94B. In order to perform the variable display of decorative symbols and other various effects, the process of determining the fixed decorative symbols and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of the special symbols and the type of display result is included. . When the variable display start setting process is executed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”.

  The variable display effect process in step S 9172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 9120 generates various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (the effect control timer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 9122. , And various kinds of effect control during the variable display of the decorative symbols are included. In addition, in the variable display effect processing, the finalized symbol as the final stop symbol that becomes the variable symbol display result corresponding to the reception of the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 911 is completely stopped and displayed. Processing to display (derived display) is included. Note that, in response to the end code being read from the predetermined effect control pattern, the finalized decorative symbol may be displayed in a complete stop (derived display). In this case, when the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed, the production control board 912 side autonomously does not rely on the production control command from the main board 911. The fixed display pattern can be derived and displayed on the screen to determine the variable display result. After performing such effect control, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S 9173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. The special figure waiting process is based on the variable display result notified by the variable display result notification command or the determination result of whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 911 is received. It includes a process for determining whether or not it is controlled. For example, depending on whether or not the hit start designation command received from the main board 911 has been received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time set in the variable display effect processing in step S 9172 has elapsed, the big hit gaming state It may be determined whether or not it is controlled. When the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponding to “big hit”, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”, while the variable display result corresponds to “lost”. If it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0”.

  The effect process when the attacker is released in step S9174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. The attacker opening effect process includes, for example, a process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the big hit gaming state and controlling the execution of various effects based on the set content. More specifically, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 95, the sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 98L and 98R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 913, the lamp It is possible to perform effects during a predetermined period in which the grand prize winning door as an attacker is opened, such as turning on, turning off, or blinking the game effect lamp 99 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the control board 914 To. In the attacker opening effect process, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 911.

  The ending effect process in step S9175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. The ending effect process includes, for example, a process of setting an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state and the like and controlling the execution of various effects based on the set contents. More specifically, the effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 95, the sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 98L and 98R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 913, the lamp An effect at the end of the big hit gaming state, such as turning on, turning off, or blinking the game effect lamp 99 or the decoration LED by outputting a command (electric decoration signal) to the control board 914, can be executed.

  FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S9161 in FIG. 60 as the virtual space display process. In the virtual space display process shown in FIG. 61, first, it is determined whether or not a planar image is being displayed (step S9201). In step S9201, for example, when a planar image display flag stored in a predetermined area (such as an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 9122 is on, it may be determined that a planar image is being displayed. If it is determined that a planar image is being displayed (step S9201; Yes), the virtual space display process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9201 that the planar image is not being displayed (step S9201; No), it is determined whether it is the start of space display (step S9202). In step S9202, when the display of the planar image is terminated and the image display of the virtual space is started, it may be determined that the space display is started. When it is determined that the space display is started (step S9202; Yes), setting for generating a virtual space is performed (step S9203). In step S9203, initial setting of a three-dimensional scene serving as a virtual space is performed.

  Subsequent to step S9203, an initial arrangement of objects to be displayed is set (step S9204). The initial arrangement of objects may be specified by control data of an effect control pattern stored in advance in the ROM 9121. Alternatively, when the effect control CPU 9120 specifies the initial display of the virtual space for the VDP of the display control unit 9123, it may be specified by the initial setting information of the virtual space read from the image data memory. Thereafter, initial setting of the virtual camera in the virtual space is performed (step S9205). In step S9205, the virtual camera initial setting information used for the initial display of the virtual space is designated based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 9120 or the virtual space initial setting information read from the image data memory. Virtual camera initial setting information includes virtual camera type (perspective projection or orthographic projection), position coordinates (virtual camera initial viewpoint position), tilt, visual axis (center coordinates of visual field range), viewing angle (view angle) Information indicating the whole or part of the aspect (the aspect ratio of the display screen) and the clipping range (the front clip plane and the rear clip plane of the viewing volume) may be used. Such initial setting of the virtual camera enables initial setting of the field of view (field-of-view range) in the virtual space. In accordance with the settings in steps S9203 to S9205, various settings necessary for displaying an image in the virtual space, such as the arrangement, type, and brightness of the light source in the virtual space, may be performed.

  When it is determined in step S9202 that the space display is not started (step S9202; No), after the setting in step S9205, a dance display control process (step S9206), a pre-production control process (step S9207), or normal Display control processing (step S9208) is sequentially executed. Thereafter, after setting for performing drawing of the virtual space using a predetermined projection transformation is performed (step S9209), the virtual space display process is terminated. In step S9209, for example, various coordinate conversions, hidden surface removal, shading, blending, or image data processing combining some or all of these is performed according to display control commands corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern. It suffices if it can be executed by the VDP of the unit 9123.

  FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S9206 of FIG. 61 as the dance display control process. In the hold display section 95H of the image display device 95, a dance display of a predetermined operation and mode is performed. As an example of the dance display, images of dancers CHa corresponding to the number “4”, which is the upper limit value of the number of reserved memories corresponding to winning at the first start winning opening, may be displayed. The image of the dancer CHa may be displayed on the layer on the back side (rear side) for the player rather than the decorative design image when the decorative design is variably displayed. The dance display includes a changing dance display and a stopped dance display. It suffices if the dance display during movement and the dance display during stop have different operations or modes in the image display of the dancer CHa. Note that images of dancers CHa having different actions may be displayed in a common manner, and images of dancers CHa having common actions may be displayed in different manners. The same applies to the case where the operation and mode are different.

  In the dance display control process shown in FIG. 62, it is determined whether or not the changing display condition is satisfied (step S9301). The changing display condition may be set in advance using the control data of the effect control pattern as a condition for performing the dance display in the operation and manner corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol. The effect control CPU 9120 may execute a predetermined condition determination program to determine whether or not the changing display condition is satisfied. In step S9301, when the start of variable display is specified by the change start command from the main board 911 during execution of the stopped dance display, it may be determined that the changing display condition is satisfied. If it is determined that the changing display condition is satisfied (step S9301; Yes), control for starting the changing dance display is performed (step S9302). In step S9302, image data processing for displaying an image of the dancer CHa in a corresponding operation or manner during execution of variable display is performed by the display control unit 9123 by a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern. It can be executed by VDP. Under the control in step S9302, the output of the corresponding music or video is started during the execution of variable display, and the image of the dancer CHa having a different operation or mode may be displayed according to the music or video.

  If it is determined in step S9301 that the changing start condition is not satisfied (step S9301; No), it is determined whether the stop display condition is satisfied (step S9303). The display condition during stop may be set in advance using the control data of the production control pattern as a condition for performing the dance display in the operation and manner corresponding to the stop of the variable display. The effect control CPU 9120 may execute a predetermined condition determination program to determine whether or not the stop display condition is satisfied. In step S9303, the time elapsed since the last reception of the firing on command after receiving the demonstration display command (customer waiting demonstration command) from the main board 911 during execution of the changing dance display is a predetermined time ( For example, it may be determined that the stop display start condition is satisfied when the time reaches 15 seconds.

  The demonstration display command is an effect control command that is transmitted from the main board 911 in response to the end of variable display and designates demonstration display (demonstration screen display). The demonstration display may be a display capable of displaying a predetermined effect image (demo image) on the screen of the image display device 95, for example. The launch-on command is an effect control command that is transmitted from the main board 911 when the game ball is detected by the launch ball detection sensor and indicates that the game ball is being launched. The shot ball detection sensor is a proximity sensor or photo that can detect whether or not a game ball is being fired at a predetermined position of the game board 92 (for example, in the vicinity of the hitting ball launching device or an arbitrary location on the guide rail). What is necessary is just a sensor. When the launch ball detection sensor does not detect the launch of the game ball, a launch off command indicating that the game ball has not been launched may be transmitted.

  If it is determined in step S9303 that the stop display condition is satisfied (step S9303; Yes), control to start the stop dance display is performed (step S9304). In step S9304, the display control unit 9123 performs image data processing for displaying an image of the dancer CHa in a corresponding operation or mode while the variable display is stopped by a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern. It can be executed by VDP. Under the control in step S9304, the dancing dance display is ended and the reproduction of the music and video being output is also ended, and the image of the dancer CHa is displayed in an operation and manner according to the music and video dedicated to the stop. do it.

  If it is determined in step S9303 that the stop display condition is not satisfied (step S9303; No), control is performed to continue the dance display being executed (step S9305). Thus, when the changing dance display is being executed, the changing dance display is continuously executed until it is determined in step S9303 that the stop display condition is satisfied. On the other hand, when the stopping dance display is being executed, the stopping dance display is continuously executed until it is determined in step S9301 that the changing display condition is satisfied.

  After performing the control according to any of Steps S9302, S9304, and S9305, it is determined whether or not there is a start winning (Step S9306). In step S9306, when the occurrence of the first start prize is specified by the start opening prize designation command from the main board 911, it may be determined that there is a start prize. Even when the occurrence of the second start prize is specified by the start opening prize designation command, it may be determined that there is a start prize. If it is determined that there is no start prize (step S9306; No), the dance display control process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a start winning (step S9306; Yes), after updating the hold display at the time of starting winning (step S9307), the dance display control process is terminated. In step S9307, image data processing for making the dancer CHa image conspicuous can be executed by the VDP of the display control unit 9123 in accordance with a display control command in accordance with the occurrence of the start prize. For example, the spotlight 95h may be displayed as the hold display, and the image of the dancer CHa may be displayed so that the image of the dancer CHa is conspicuous.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S9207 of FIG. 61 as the pre-production control process. In the pachinko gaming machine 91, there may be an effect including a prior effect, a notification effect, and a result notification effect as a notification effect. Among these, the prior effect includes a display effect using an image of the virtual space generated in real time, and the notification effect and the result notification effect include a display effect using a plane image prepared in advance. Since the prior effect includes a display effect using an image of the virtual space, the prior effect control process is executed in the virtual space display process. In response to the end of the pre-effect, when the notification effect is started, the display using the virtual space image is switched to the display using the planar image.

  In the prior effect control process shown in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not the notice effect is started (step S9321). The effect control CPU 9120 may determine whether or not it is the start of the notice effect based on the control data of the effect control pattern. If it is determined that the notice effect is to be started (step S9321; Yes), a setting for selecting a virtual camera is performed in response to the start of the effect (step S9322). In addition, the viewpoint and the visual axis are set in response to the start of the production (step S9323).

  In the virtual space, movement paths corresponding to a plurality of virtual cameras are determined in advance. The plurality of virtual cameras can change the selection of the virtual camera to be used when a predetermined camera change condition is satisfied while displaying an image of the virtual space. In steps S9322 and S9323, a virtual camera capable of capturing a specific field of view in the virtual space is selected by the VDP of the display control unit 9123 according to a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern, and the viewpoint of the selected virtual camera is selected. The visual axis may be set. The specific field of view in the virtual space may be specified in advance as the field of view when the specific object arranged in the virtual space is imaged from the specific viewpoint with the specific visual axis. The specific object only needs to be specified in advance as a display target of a form (contour, pattern, color, etc.) representing a specific character or an arbitrary object.

  Following the setting in step S9323, a zoom-in display period is set (step S9324). The zoom-in display period is a period during which the virtual camera is moved with respect to a specific object placed in the virtual space after setting the visual field of the virtual space captured by the virtual camera to the specific visual field in advance production, etc. As long as it is specified in advance. The period during which the pre-production is executed may be specified so that the entire zoom-in display period is set. The movement of the virtual camera with respect to the specific object may be a movement in which the virtual camera approaches linearly toward the specific object, for example. Instead of moving the virtual camera, the zoom magnification of the virtual camera may be changed. That is, the zoom-in display period may be a period in which the zoom magnification of the virtual camera for a specific object arranged in the virtual space is changed.

  After the zoom-in display period is set in step S9324, setting for starting effect display is performed (step S9325). The effect display is a display that is added to a specific object to enhance the decoration effect as the specific object arranged in the virtual space is zoomed in. In step S9325, image data processing for effect display may be executed by the VDP of the display control unit 9123 by a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern. Subsequent to the setting in step S9325, control for starting zoom-in is performed (step S9326), and the preliminary effect control process is terminated. In step S 9326, image data processing in accordance with the movement of the virtual camera with respect to the specific object arranged in the virtual space can be executed by the VDP of the display control unit 9123 by a display control command according to the control data of the effect control pattern. It only has to be.

  When it is determined in step S9321 that the notice effect is not started (step S9321; No), it is determined whether it is a zoom-in display period (step S9327). When it is determined that it is not the zoom-in display period (step S9327; No), since the pre-production is not executed, the pre-production control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the zoom-in display period is set (step S9327; Yes), control for continuing zoom-in is performed (step S9328). Then, it is determined whether or not the zoom-in is complete (step S9329). In step S9329, for example, when the elapsed time measured using the zoom-in timer reaches a completion determination value determined in advance corresponding to the zoom-in display period, it may be determined that zoom-in is completed.

  If it is determined in step S9329 that the zoom-in has not been completed (step S9329; No), the preliminary effect control process is terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the zoom-in is completed (step S9329; Yes), it is determined whether or not it is the notice effect pattern YPA0 (step S9330). As shown in FIG. 66 (C), in the case of the notice effect pattern YPA0, only the prior effect is executed, and the notification effect and the result notification effect are not executed. For this reason, the notice effect is ended without switching the display of the image in the virtual space to the display of the planar image. Therefore, when it is determined that the preview effect pattern YPA0 is set (step S9330; Yes), control for terminating the zoom-in is performed in response to the completion of the zoom-in corresponding to the end of the zoom-in display period (step S9331). In step S9331, for example, the selection of the virtual camera set in steps S9322 and S9323, the viewpoint and the visual axis may be reset, and the visual field may be moved from that position during normal times other than during execution of the notice effect. . Alternatively, it may be possible to select a virtual camera different from the settings in steps S9322 and S9323 and to set the viewpoint and visual axis so that the field of view can be moved during normal times. The selection of the virtual camera corresponding to the completion of the zoom-in and the setting of the viewpoint and the visual axis may be specified in advance by the control data of the production control pattern, etc. May be determined.

  If it is determined in step S9330 that it is not the notice effect pattern YPA0 (step S9330; No), control or setting corresponding to the case of switching the display of the image in the virtual space to the display of the planar image is performed. As shown in FIG. 66 (C), in the case of any of the notice effect patterns YPA1 to YPA4 other than the notice effect pattern YPA0, the notice effect and the result notice effect are executed after the prior effect is executed. . Therefore, the display of the image in the virtual space is switched to the display of the planar image in response to the end of the pre-effect. In these cases, control for displaying the intermediate image is performed (step S9332). The intermediate image only needs to be prepared in advance as an effect image for preventing a sense of incongruity associated with display switching when the image in the virtual space is switched to a flat image. In step S9332, it is only necessary that the image data processing for displaying the intermediate image can be executed in the VDP of the display control unit 9123 by a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern.

  Subsequent to the control in step S9332, control for displaying a planar image is performed (step S9333). The plane image may be prepared in advance as specific image data used for executing the notification effect following the prior effect. The planar image displayed in the notification effect and the result notification effect is a still image of a plurality of frames using image data encoded using an encoding method (for example, GIF, PNG, BMP, JPEG, etc.) corresponding to the still image. Animation display may be performed by continuously playing back images. Alternatively, the planar image displayed in the notification effect and the result notification effect is a moving image using image data encoded using an encoding method (for example, MOV, OGG, DivX, MPEG, etc.) corresponding to the moving image. May be displayed. At this time, after performing the corresponding setting during the display of the planar image (step S9334), the pre-effect control process is terminated. In step S9334, for example, a planar image display flag may be set to an on state.

  FIG. 64 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S9208 of FIG. 61 as the normal display control process. In the normal display control process shown in FIG. 64, it is determined whether or not a pre-production is being performed (step S9341). In step S9341, for example, when a zoom-in display period is set, it may be determined that the pre-production is being performed. Of the notice effects, when a notification effect or a result notification effect is being executed, a plane image is displayed. By determining in step S9201 of FIG. 61 that the plane image is being displayed, The normal display control process itself is not executed. If it is determined in step S9341 that pre-production is being performed (step S9341; Yes), the normal display control process is terminated. If it is determined that the pre-production is not being performed (step S9341; No), it is determined whether the camera change condition is satisfied (step S9342). The camera change condition may be specified in advance as a condition for changing the selection of a virtual camera that captures an image of the virtual space, for example, by control data of an effect control pattern. The effect control CPU 9120 may execute a predetermined condition determination program to determine whether the camera change condition is satisfied. As an example, when the current time becomes a specific time, it may be determined that the camera change condition is satisfied. When the number of executions of the variable display becomes a specific number, it may be determined that the camera change condition is satisfied. You may determine with camera change conditions having been satisfied when it changed to specific production mode. In addition, it is determined whether or not the camera change condition is satisfied at a predetermined rate at any predetermined timing in accordance with the progress of the game or the progress of the performance, or regardless of the progress of the game or the progress of the performance. May be.

  If it is determined in step S9342 that the camera change condition is satisfied (step S9342; Yes), a setting for changing the selection of the virtual camera is performed (step S9343). In step S9343, the virtual camera that captures the virtual space is changed by the VDP of the display control unit 9123, for example, by a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern, and the viewpoint and visual axis of the virtual camera after the change are set. What should I do? The selection of the plurality of virtual cameras may be changed in a predetermined order. Which virtual camera is selected may be determined at a predetermined rate. As the selection ratio of the virtual camera, a ratio different from that when the ratio change condition is satisfied may be set. The plurality of virtual cameras may include a first virtual camera and a second virtual camera having a higher selection ratio than the first virtual camera. When the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous state, it is possible to select a different virtual camera from the case where it is not controlled to the big hit gaming state, or the virtual camera at a different selection ratio May be selected. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit” and the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state, which is an advantageous state, a specific virtual camera having a higher selection ratio than other virtual cameras may be included. Whether or not to be controlled to the big hit gaming state may be specified by a winning determination result command included in the start winning command, or may be specified by a variable display result notification command included in the variable display start command Good. That is, based on information relating to variable display, different virtual cameras may be selectable, or virtual cameras may be selected at different selection ratios. When the effect state in the pachinko gaming machine 91 is the specific effect mode, a virtual camera different from that in the normal effect mode may be selectable, or the virtual camera may be selected at a different selection ratio. In addition, it may be determined which virtual camera is selected at a different rate according to the progress of the game or the progress of the effect, or at a common rate regardless of the progress of the game or the progress of the effect.

  If it is determined in step S9342 that the camera change condition is not satisfied (step S342; No), or after setting in step S9343, control is performed to update the object arrangement (step S9344). The arrangement information of the object may be indicated by control data of an effect control pattern stored in advance in the ROM 9101. Alternatively, when the effect control CPU 9120 designates the object arrangement update for the VDP of the display control unit 9123, data indicating the object arrangement information may be read from the image data memory. Thereafter, after setting the viewpoint and visual axis during normal display (step S9345), the normal display control process is terminated. In step S9345, based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 9120 or the virtual camera update information read from the image data memory, the position coordinates serving as the viewpoint of the virtual camera and the visual field range serving as the visual axis of the virtual camera. It is sufficient to set the center coordinates of the two to be changeable as time elapses. Thereby, the update setting of the field of view (field-of-view range) in the virtual space may be enabled. In accordance with the settings and controls in steps S9343 to S9345, various settings necessary for displaying an image in the virtual space such as the arrangement, type, and brightness of the light source in the virtual space may be updated.

  FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S 9171 of FIG. 60 as variable display start setting processing. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 65, a final stop symbol or the like to be a finalized symbol as a variable symbol display result is determined (step S9401). The final stop symbol is determined based on variable display contents such as a variation pattern indicated by a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 911 and a variable display result indicated by a variable display result notification command. As an example, in step S9401, variable display contents corresponding to the combination of the fluctuation pattern and the variable display result include “non-reach (loss)”, “reach (loss)”, “non-probability change (big hit)”, “probability change (big hit). ) ”May be specified.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is not changed to the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result is “lost”. " When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach lose combination is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result becomes “losing”. . The non-reach combination definitive decorative design and the reach lose combination definitive decorative design are included in the definite combination definitive decorative design corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. When the variable display content is “non-probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big hit”, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state is the short-time state. When the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”, the variable display result is “big win”, and the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is changed to the probable state.

  When the variable display content is “non-reach (losing)”, the final stop symbol is determined to be different (mismatched) ornament symbols in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 95L and 95R. Is done. When the variable display content is “reach (losing)”, the final stop symbol is determined to be the same (matching) ornament symbol in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 95L and 95R. Is done. When the variable display contents are “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, the final stop symbols are displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. Are determined to be the same (matching) decorative designs. At this time, depending on whether the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed, etc. It is only necessary to determine which one of the decorative design (depicted decorative design) and the probability variation design (for example, the decorative design indicating an odd number) is the final decorative design. Further, when the variable display content is “non-probability change (big hit)” or “probability change (big hit)”, it may be determined whether or not to execute a probability change promotion effect such as a re-lottery effect or a jackpot promotion effect.

  Following the determination of the final stop symbol and the like in step S9401, a notice effect is determined (step S9402). For example, in the process of step S9402, the effect control CPU 9120 first determines the presence or absence of the notice effect, whether or not to execute the notice effect. At this time, when it is determined that there is a notice effect, a notice effect pattern is determined. The effect control CPU 9120 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the notice effect updated by the random number circuit 9124 or the effect random counter, and refers to the notice effect determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 9121. For example, the presence or absence of the notice effect may be determined. The effect control CPU 9120 refers to numerical data indicating a random value for determining the notice effect pattern that is updated by the random number circuit 9124 or the effect random counter, etc. Any one of the notice effect patterns may be determined.

  After determining the notice effect in step S9402, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S9403). For example, the effect control CPU 9120 selects one of a plurality of special-figure variation effect control patterns prepared in correspondence with the variation pattern indicated by the variation pattern designation command and sets it as a usage pattern. Further, the effect control CPU 9120 selects any one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns corresponding to the result of determination of the notice effect by the processing of step S9402 and sets it as a use pattern.

  The effect control pattern may be composed of process data including a part or all of the effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and end code, for example. The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of an effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 9122. The determination value corresponding to the execution time (effect time) of each effect is set in advance. The display control data is data that specifies the display content of the effect image on the display screen of the image display device 95. The audio control data is data for designating audio output contents from the speakers 98L and 98R. The lamp control data is data for designating the lighting contents of the light emitter. The operation detection control data is data for designating the content of the effect according to the detection result of the operation corresponding to the player's operation.

  Subsequent to step S9403, the initial value of the effect control process timer is set (step S9404). The effect control process timer may be provided in a predetermined area (such as an effect control timer setting unit) of the RAM 9122. In step S9404, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer may be set in correspondence with the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. Thereafter, a setting for starting a change (variable display) such as a decorative design on the screen of the image display device 95 is performed (step S9405). In step S9405, a display control command corresponding to the control data of the effect control pattern is transmitted to the VDP of the display control unit 9123. Thus, the variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 95L, 95C, and 95R provided on the screen of the image display device 95.

  In addition, the update setting of the hold display at the start of variable display is performed (step S9406). In step S9406, image data processing for making the image of the dancer CHa inconspicuous can be executed by the VDP of the display control unit 9123 by a display control command in accordance with the start of variable display. For example, when the spotlight 95h is displayed as the hold display, the image of the dancer CHa may be displayed so as not to stand out by displaying an image in which the spotlight hitting the dancer CHa is turned off. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S9407), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  FIG. 66 (A) shows an example of determination in step S9402 of FIG. In step S9402 of FIG. 65, for example, the presence / absence of the notice effect is determined at a rate corresponding to the variable display content as shown in FIG. As an example, in step S9402, the variable display content corresponding to the combination of the variation pattern and the variable display result is any one of “non-reach (losing)”, “normal (losing)”, “super (losing)”, and “big hit”. It suffices if it can be specified. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 66A differs depending on the variable display contents. This makes it possible to vary the degree of expectation that the variable display result will be “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state, and the degree of expectation that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will reach the reach state, depending on the presence or absence of the notice effect. Can do. That is, the notice effect is an effect suggesting that the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state.

  When the variable display content is “Normal (Lose)”, after the variable display state of the decorative pattern has reached the reach state, the reach effect by the normal reach variation pattern is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach-losing combination is stopped and displayed. Is done. When the variable display content is “Super (Lose)”, after the variable display state of the decorative pattern reaches the reach state, the reach effect by the super reach variation pattern is executed, and then the fixed decorative pattern of the reach / lack combination is stopped. Is displayed. When the variable display content is “big hit”, the variable display content that can be specified in step S9401 of FIG. 65 includes “non-probable change (big hit)” and the variable display content is “probable change (big hit)”. It is out.

  FIG. 66 (B) shows an example of a notice effect execution section. The notice effect is executed in the order of a prior effect, a notification effect, and a result notification effect. The period during which the prior effect is executed is the first period, and the period during which the notification effect and the result notification effect are executed is the second period. In the first period, an image of the virtual space is displayed. In the second period, a planar image prepared in advance is displayed. At the timing when the first period ends and becomes the second period, the intermediate image is displayed and the display of the image in the virtual space is switched to the display of the planar image by the control in step S9332 shown in FIG.

  The prior effect is an effect that causes the player to recall that the notice effect is started. The notification effect is an effect that causes the player to recognize that the notice effect is started and the result of the notification is notified. The result notification effect is an effect for suggesting that the variable display result will be a “hit” and controlled to the jackpot gaming state, or that it may be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, as the result of the notice effect. It is.

  FIG. 66C shows an example of setting the content of the notice effect according to the notice effect pattern. As shown in FIG. 66C, notice effect patterns YPA0 to YPA4 are prepared in advance as a plurality of notice effect patterns. The predetermined area of the ROM 9121 may be provided with a notice effect pattern table for storing the notice effect patterns YPA0 to YPA4. In the notice effect pattern YPA0, after the preliminary effect is executed, the notice effect is finished without executing the second period effect such as the notification effect and the result notification effect. That is, only the prior effect is executed, and the notice effect is ended without switching the display of the image in the virtual space to the display of the planar image. In the notice effect pattern YPA1, after executing the advance effect and the notification effect, the result notification effect of notifying the “20%” message is executed. In the notice effect pattern YPA2, after the preliminary effect and the notification effect are executed, the result notification effect of notifying the “chance” message is executed. In the notice effect pattern YPA3, after executing the advance effect and the notification effect, the result notification effect of notifying the message of “hot” is executed. In the notice effect pattern YPA4, after executing the advance effect and the notification effect, the result notification effect of notifying the “big hit” message is executed.

  When the preliminary announcement is completed in the first period and the preliminary announcement is finished without executing the announcement or result notification in the second period (in the case of the preliminary announcement pattern YPA0), or in the second period When the notice effect or the result notice effect is executed and the notice effect ends (in the case other than the notice effect pattern YPA0), the selection of the virtual camera, the viewpoint and the visual axis are reset, and the notice effect is started from the position. It may be possible to move the field of view during normal times other than during execution. As an example, in response to the end of the notice effect, the virtual camera that has been selected before the pre-effect is selected again, and the virtual camera is moved from a predetermined initial position corresponding to each virtual camera. It is only necessary to start and enable the update setting of the field of view (view range) in the virtual space. Alternatively, a camera different from the virtual camera selected before the execution of the pre-production may be selected at a predetermined ratio, and the movement of the virtual camera may be started from an initial position determined in advance corresponding to each virtual camera. If the virtual camera that was selected before the pre-production is selected again, the viewpoint and visual axis of the virtual camera are set in the same way as before the pre-production, and the field of view (view range) ) To enable the update setting. When the execution of the notice effect is finished, it may be possible to select a different virtual camera or reset the viewpoint and the visual axis according to the notice effect pattern in the notice effect. It may be possible to reset the viewpoint and the visual axis. When the execution of the notice effect ends, the variable display result becomes “big hit”, and depending on whether or not it is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state, a different virtual camera is selected and the viewpoint and visual axis are reset. Alternatively, the virtual camera may be selected and the viewpoint and the visual axis may be reset at different ratios.

  FIG. 66 (D) shows the determination ratio when the notice effect pattern is determined in step S9402 of FIG. In step S9402 of FIG. 65, when there is a notice effect for executing the notice effect, the notice effect pattern is determined at a rate corresponding to the variable display contents as shown in FIG. The determination ratio shown in FIG. 66 (D) differs depending on the variable display contents. As a result, specific effects such as the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state according to the notice effect pattern, and the reach effect by the super reach variation pattern after the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. The degree of expectation that is executed can be varied. That is, according to the effect mode of the notice effect, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state as the advantageous state can be varied, or the ratio at which the specific effect is executed can be varied.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S9172 of FIG. 60 as the variable display effect process. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 67, for example, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer or the like, it is determined whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed (step S9421). In step S9421, when the timer value of the effect control process timer is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted) and the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, the variable display time is changed. It may be determined that has passed.

  If it is determined in step S9421 that the variable display time has not elapsed (step S9421; No), it is determined whether or not it is a notification effect period (step S422). The notification effect period may be specified in advance in, for example, the effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern or the like) determined in step S9403 of FIG. If it is determined that the notification effect period is in effect (step S9422; Yes), control for executing the notification effect is performed (step S9423). In step S9423, various commands are transmitted to the display control unit 9123, the sound control board 913, the lamp control board 914, and the like based on the control data of the notice effect control pattern. Thereby, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the screen of the image display device 95, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 98L and 98R, and the game effect lamp 99 and the decoration LED are turned on, turned off, and blinking. In other words, it is only necessary that the effect for notification can be executed by a predetermined effect device by combining some or all of them. At this time, a planar image using the specific image data is displayed on the screen of the image display device 95.

  When it is determined in step S9422 that it is not the notification effect period (step S9422; No), after performing the control in step S9423, it is determined whether it is the result notification effect period (step S9424). The result notification effect period may be specified in advance, for example, in the effect control pattern (notice effect control pattern or the like) determined in step S9403 of FIG. When it is determined as the result notification effect period (step S9424; Yes), control for executing the result notification effect is performed (step S9425). When it is determined that it is not the result notification effect period (step S9424; No), after performing the control in step S9425, it is determined whether it is a reach effect period (step S9426). The reach production period may be determined in advance, for example, in the production control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that the reach effect period is reached (step S9426; Yes), control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S9427). When it is determined that it is not the reach production period (step S9426; No), after performing the control in step S9427, for example, based on the setting in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. After performing the control for executing the effect during the variable display including the variable display operation of the decorative design (step S9428), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If the variable display time has elapsed in step S9421 (step S9421; Yes), it is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation command transmitted from the main board 911 has been received (step S9429). At this time, if there is no reception of the symbol confirmation command (step S9429; No), the variable display effect processing is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has elapsed without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to successfully receive the symbol confirmation command. You may make it do.

  When a symbol confirmation command is received in step S9429 (step S9429; Yes), for example, in a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 9123, for example. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (definite decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S9430). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting start designation command reception waiting time (step S9431). Further, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S9432), and then the effect process during variable display is ended.

  FIG. 68 shows a case where the operation of the dancer CHa is changed as a first execution example of the dancing dance display and the dancing dance display. Note that a video corresponding to the music being output may be displayed as the background image. When it is determined in step S9301 shown in FIG. 62 that the changing display condition is satisfied, the changing dance display as shown in FIG. 68A is performed under the control of step S9302. The dancing dance display in FIG. 68 (A) shows a scene in which the dancer CHa dances according to the song C being output. Corresponding to the fact that the number of stored memories is “1”, a spotlight 95h that is displayed on hold is displayed corresponding to the dancer CHa. Thereafter, even if the variable display is ended, the variable dance as shown in FIG. 68 (B) is controlled by the control in step S9305 until it is determined in step S9303 that the stopped display condition is satisfied. Display continues. The image of the dancer CHa may be displayed on the layer on the back side (rear side) for the player rather than the decorative design.

  When it is determined that the stop display condition is satisfied in step S9303 shown in FIG. 62 while the changing dance display as shown in FIG. 68B is performed, the control in step S9304 or the like is performed. 68. The stopped dance display as shown in FIG. 68 (C) is started. At this time, the display of the music and video being output may be temporarily stopped, the music dedicated for the stop may be output, and the video corresponding thereto may be displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (C), the dancers being displayed may be displayed at positions away from the player, and dances that are displayed in a single row and whose operation is slower than during variable display may be performed. On the other hand, the music and dance may be changed without changing the display position of the dancer. Also, the same dance as during variable display may be performed, and the output position of the music to be output and the dancer may be changed. The decorative design may be saved in a lower left position on the screen of the image display device 95 as a dedicated position for standby. The stand-by dedicated position may be any position that does not interfere with the dancer's visual recognition and is not displayed during a game such as a big hit game, a game ball being fired, or a variable display other than during the variable display. Good. Then, when the game ball wins the first start winning opening and the first start winning is generated, it is sufficient to return to the changing dance display of FIG.

  FIG. 69 shows a case where the display mode of the dancer CHa is changed as a second example of the dancing dance display and the dancing display during stop. In this example, as shown in FIG. 69A, when the spotlight 95h is displayed corresponding to the dancer CHa as the hold display, the mode of the dancer CHa image itself is also changed. When the stop display condition is not satisfied, the changing dance display is continuously performed as shown in FIG. Thereafter, when the stop display condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 69C, the image of the dancer CHa may be switched to the silhouette image, and the decorative symbol may be saved at the dedicated position for standby.

  FIG. 70 shows an example of movement of the viewpoint and the visual axis as seen from above the virtual space for a plurality of virtual cameras that can be used to display an image of the virtual space. In this virtual space, an object corresponding to the character PM1 is arranged as a specific object. In the example shown in FIG. 70, any one of the three virtual cameras CA1 to CA3 can be selected as the plurality of virtual cameras. The first virtual camera CA1 is movable along an arcuate path LT1 connecting the end point TA11 and the end point TA12, and the visual axis DV1 is directed to the object of the character PM1. The second virtual camera CA2 is movable along an arcuate path LT2 connecting the end point TA21 and the end point TA22, and the visual axis DV2 is directed toward the object of the character PM1. The third virtual camera CA3 is movable along a linear path LT3 connecting the end point TA31 and the end point TA32, and the visual axis DV3 is directed to the object of the character PM1.

  If it is determined in step S9202 shown in FIG. 61 that the space display is started, the virtual camera is initially set in step S9205. At this time, for example, the first virtual camera CA1 may be selected, and the viewpoint and the visual axis based on the initial setting information may be set. If it is determined in step S9342 that the camera change condition is satisfied, the selection of the virtual camera is switched by the setting in step S9343. For example, when the first virtual camera CA1 is used, the second virtual camera CA2 may be changed to be selected. When the second virtual camera CA2 is used, the third virtual camera CA3 may be changed to be selected. When the third virtual camera CA3 is used, the first virtual camera CA1 may be changed to be selected.

  FIG. 71 shows a more specific execution example in the case of imaging a virtual space using a virtual camera. The virtual camera only needs to be movable not only in the horizontal direction (left-right front-rear direction) as shown in FIG. 70 but also in the vertical direction (up-down direction) as indicated by an arrow AR1 in FIG. In the virtual space VS imaged by the virtual camera, for example, a dancer CHa is arranged on the stage, and an object of the character PM1 serving as a specific object is arranged on the back side (rear side) of the stage. The virtual camera only needs to be able to image the virtual space VS in the direction of viewing the stage from the audience side. Note that a virtual camera capable of imaging the virtual space VS in a direction in which the stage is viewed from the lateral direction (stage sleeve side) may be provided, and selection may be changed by setting in step S9343 shown in FIG. During normal display, the viewpoint and visual axis are set in step S9345 shown in FIG. 64 so that the object of the character PM1 falls within the field of view while the virtual camera moves smoothly on the path. do it. During normal display, the viewpoint and the visual axis may be set so that the dancer CHa can be easily displayed, and the object of the character PM1 may not be within the range of view.

  FIG. 72 shows a display example of the virtual space. When the first virtual camera CA1 shown in FIG. 15 is selected in step S9205 shown in FIG. 61, a scene obtained by imaging the stage from the front is displayed as shown in FIG. 72A, for example. Thereafter, when the first virtual camera CA1 is moved in the direction of the end point TA11 shown in FIG. 70 by the setting in step S9345 shown in FIG. 64, for example, as shown in FIG. The scene taken from is displayed. On the other hand, when the first virtual camera CA1 is moved in the direction of the end point TA12 shown in FIG. 70 by the setting in step S9345 shown in FIG. 64, for example, as shown in FIG. The scene captured from the right side is displayed. After the display of FIG. 72 (B) is performed, the display may return to the display of FIG. 72 (A), the display of FIG. 72 (C) may be performed, and the display of FIG. 72 (A) may be returned again. Alternatively, the display shown in FIGS. 72A to 72C is performed by changing the selection among the first to third virtual cameras CA1 to CA3 by the setting in step S9343 shown in FIG. May be.

  When the display shown in FIGS. 72 (A) to 72 (C) is performed, if it is determined in step S9321 shown in FIG. 63 that the advance effect is started, the notice effect is set in steps S9322 and S9323. The selection of the virtual camera and the setting of the viewpoint and the visual axis corresponding to the start of the included pre-production are performed. For example, in step S9322, the first virtual camera CA1 shown in FIG. 70 is selected, and in step S9323, the viewpoint PT0 and the visual axis DV0 shown in FIG. 70 are set. Thereby, the field of view in imaging of the moving virtual camera is set to a specific field of view in the virtual space. Therefore, in response to the start of the pre-production, for example, as shown in FIG. 72D, a scene obtained by imaging the stage from the front is displayed. Thereafter, effect display is started by the setting of step S9325 shown in FIG. 63, and zoom-in is started by control of step S9326. For example, as shown in FIG. 72E, the image of the effect EG1 added to the object of the character PM1 serving as the specific object is displayed, and the virtual camera is moved so as to zoom in on the object of the character PM1.

  After the zoom-in display as shown in FIG. 72 (E) is performed, if it is determined in step S9329 in FIG. 63 that the zoom-in is completed, if it is other than the notice effect pattern YPA0, the control in step S9332 is performed. The intermediate image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 72F, an image of the flash FG1 covering the display of the character PM1 or the like is displayed as an intermediate image. Also, the image in the virtual space is switched to a flat image and displayed under the control of step S9333 shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIG. 72 (G), a plane image in the notification effect is displayed including the display of the effect image corresponding to the character PM1 as the specific object. Thereafter, the display of the effect image corresponding to the notification effect and the result notification effect may be advanced. Unlike the image in the virtual space, the effect image corresponding to the notification effect and the result notification effect need not be generated in real time, and can be displayed using specific image data prepared in advance. As a result, the display in the notification effect and the result notification effect using the flat image can be performed at a higher resolution than in the case of displaying the image in the virtual space, and the decorativeness in the notice effect is enhanced, and the game Can be improved.

  Note that the display of the planar image using the specific image data is other than the initial display so that the initial display when the image is switched from the image in the virtual space does not cause a sense of discomfort with the display of the object of the character PM1 that is the specific object. It may be possible to display a planar image with a lower image quality than the effect display. Thus, it is only necessary that the display can be suitably switched. Further, the display using the specific image data is not limited to the display of the planar image, and an image based on a three-dimensional computer graphic with improved image quality than the image of the virtual space may be displayed. In this way, it is only necessary to enhance the decorativeness in the notice effect by switching to an image with improved image quality over the image in the virtual space.

  In the display example of FIG. 72, after the virtual camera is selected and the viewpoint and visual axis are set so that the object of the character PM1 as the specific object arranged in the virtual space VS shown in FIG. 71 is zoomed in. A move is made. On the other hand, zooming in on the selected specific object may be performed by selecting any one of a plurality of specific objects such as a plurality of characters arranged in the virtual space VS shown in FIG. When multiple specific objects are placed, you may be able to zoom in on different specific objects according to the notice effect pattern in the notice effect, or you can select any of the specific objects at different ratios to zoom in It may be possible. When a plurality of specific objects are arranged, the variable display result may be “big hit”, and depending on whether or not the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state is controlled, zooming in on different specific objects may be possible, Zoom in may be possible by selecting any of a plurality of specific objects at different ratios.

  As for the image of the effect EG1 as shown in FIG. 72 (E), a plurality of effect images different in part or all in the form of outline, color, and pattern are prepared in advance, and any effect image is selected as the image of the effect EG1. May be. When a plurality of effect images are prepared for an effect, an image of a different effect EG1 may be displayed according to a notice effect pattern in the notice effect, or one of a plurality of effect images is selected at a different ratio Thus, the image of the effect EG1 may be displayed. When a plurality of effect images are prepared for the effect, the variable display result is “big hit”, and depending on whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state, images of different effects EG1 can be displayed. Alternatively, any of the plurality of effect images may be selected at different ratios so that the image of the effect EG1 can be displayed.

  After the image of the effect EG1 as shown in FIG. 72E is displayed and before the image of the flash FG1 as shown in FIG. 72F is displayed, the display mode of the image of the effect EG1 may be changed. Good. For example, with the progress of zooming in on the object of the character PM1, the display of the effect EG1 is emphasized by increasing the display color of the effect EG1 (decreasing transparency) or expanding the area where the effect EG1 is displayed. You may make it do. Further, the image of the effect EG1 may be changed to the image of the flash FG1, or an effect image different from the image of the effect EG1 may be displayed as the image of the flash FG1.

  A flash FG1 image that is an intermediate image as shown in FIG. 72 (F) is prepared in advance with a plurality of effect images that are partially or completely different in form, color, pattern, etc., and any effect image is flash FG1. You may select as an image. When a plurality of effect images are prepared in advance as intermediate images, different intermediate images may be displayed according to the notice effect pattern in the notice effect, or one of the plurality of effect images is selected at different ratios. The intermediate image may be displayed. When a plurality of effect images are prepared as intermediate images, different intermediate images can be displayed depending on whether or not the variable display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state as an advantageous state. Alternatively, the intermediate image may be displayed by selecting any of the plurality of effect images at different ratios.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 91 may not have all the technical features shown in the above embodiment, and the part described in the above embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may be provided with the following structure.

  In the above embodiment, in order to make the field of view in the virtual space movable, the viewpoint (positional coordinates) and the visual axis (center coordinates of the visual field range) of the virtual camera during normal display are displayed in step S9345 of FIG. It has been described that it is set to be changeable with the passage of time. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in step S9345 of FIG. 64, only one of the position coordinates serving as the viewpoint of the virtual camera and the center coordinates of the visual field range serving as the visual axis of the virtual camera is obtained. It may be set to be changeable as time passes. Or it is not limited to what makes a visual field in a virtual space movable by setting a viewpoint and a visual axis in step S9345, but in a virtual space by setting to change selection of a virtual camera in step S9343 The field of view may be movable.

  The above embodiment has been described assuming that a plurality of virtual cameras are provided and the setting for changing the selection of the virtual cameras is performed in step S9343 in FIG. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the visual field in the virtual space may be movable in an arbitrary direction using a single virtual camera. The plurality of virtual cameras may have different movable paths, such as first to third virtual cameras CA1 to CA3 shown in FIG. 70, or may be a projection conversion method (perspective projection or orthographic projection). (Projection, etc.) may be different, or tilt, viewing angle (field angle), aspect (display screen aspect ratio), clipping range (view volume front clip plane and rear clip plane) part or all of May be different. The plurality of virtual cameras is not limited to one that images a single (common) virtual space, such as a virtual space VS illustrated in FIG. 71, for example, and may be able to image different virtual spaces according to the plurality of virtual cameras. Good. In this case, when it is determined in step S9321 in FIG. 63 that the pre-production is started, the virtual camera corresponding to the production start is selected by the setting in step S9322, and a specific virtual image is selected from the plurality of virtual spaces. What is necessary is just to make it display the image by imaging space.

  In the above-described embodiment, as an advantageous state advantageous to the player, it is described that the variable display result is controlled to the big hit gaming state based on the fact that the variable display result is “big hit”. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a special game state such as a probability change state may be an advantageous state, and the upper limit number of rounds that can be executed among a plurality of big hit game states is the second round number (for example, “7 A big hit gaming state having a first round number (for example, “15”) larger than “)” may be an advantageous state. Alternatively, the time-short state in which the upper limit number of variable displays that can be executed among the plurality of time-short states is a first number (for example, “100”) greater than the second number (for example, “50”) may be an advantageous state. The probability variation state in which the big hit probability is a first probability (for example, 1/20) higher than the second probability (for example, 1/20) among the plurality of probability variation states may be set as the advantageous state. Any other game state that is advantageous to the player may be used.

  In the above-described embodiment, the “ratio” and “probability” at which various decisions are made may be 0% (not decided) or 100% (not necessarily decided), such as 70:30, for example. So that the possibility of at least one of the determination results is 0% (not determined) or 100% (always determined) It may be set. For example, in the case of making various decisions, the ratio of the determination result of any one of the plurality of determination results is higher than the ratio of the determination result of other determination results. It may be included to be 100%, or it may be included that the ratio of other determination results is 0%. When the ratio of the determination result of 1 is 100%, the ratio of the other determination result is 0%. Further, when the ratio as the other determination result is 0%, if the ratio as the determination result of 1 is a predetermined ratio other than 100% and not 0%, the ratio as the determination result of 1 is the other determination result. It will be higher than the ratio.

  In the above embodiment, for example, the winning random number is determined in step S912 shown in FIG. Thereby, the CPU 9103 of the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 determines the variable display content using the random number value, and the effect control command (winning determination result command) indicating the determination result is the effect control. It may be transmitted to the board 912 side, and the pre-reading notice effect may be executed by the effect control CPU 9120 mounted on the effect control board 912 or the like. Alternatively, for example, on the main board 911 side, the CPU 9103 of the game control microcomputer 9100 performs setting for transmitting an effect control command indicating a random value to the effect control board 912, and on the effect control board 912 side, A jackpot determination or the like may be performed using a random value indicated in the effect control command from the main board 911, and a prefetch notice effect may be executed based on the determination result. In this way, the process of determining whether or not to be controlled to an advantageous state before determining whether to control to an advantageous state such as a big hit gaming state, such as at the time of a start winning when a start winning has occurred, is performed. It is not limited to what is executed on the main board 911 side, but may be executed on the effect control board 912 side.

  In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the side of the effect control board 912 of the variation pattern indicating the variable display time, the variable display mode of the decorative design, etc., one variation pattern designation command is transmitted when variable display is started. Although an example is shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the side of the effect control board 912 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notification by two commands, the CPU 9103 of the game control microcomputer 9100 uses the first command before reaching reach, such as presence / absence of quasi-continuous fluctuation, presence / absence of sliding effect, etc. The command indicating the variable display time and variable display mode before the so-called second stop display is transmitted, and the second command is used after reaching reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (reach) If not, a command indicating a variable display time or a variable display mode after so-called second stop display may be transmitted. In this case, in the effect control board 912, for example, the effect control CPU 9120 may perform effect control in variable display based on a variable display time derived from a combination of two commands. In the game control microcomputer 9100, the variable display time is notified by each of the two commands, and a specific variable display mode executed at each timing is selected by the effect control CPU 9120. It may be. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, or after the first command is sent, after a predetermined period of time elapses (for example, in the next timer interrupt) ) A second command may be transmitted. The variable display mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern using two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern designation command can be reduced.

  In the above embodiment, the jackpot type determined in step S9102 shown in FIG. 58 includes “probability variation”, and the probability variation control condition is established based on the determination result of the jackpot type being “probability variation”. It has been described that it is possible to control the probability change state after the big hit gaming state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball that has won (entered) a big winning opening (second large winning opening) in the probability changing attacker provided at a predetermined position in the gaming area has been detected by the probability changing detection switch. Based on the above, the probability variation control condition may be established, and the gaming state after the end of the big hit gaming state may be controlled to the certain probability variation state. The probability winning attacker's big prize opening (second big prize opening) can change from a closed state to an open state when the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state is a predetermined number of times (for example, “16”). When the number of times of execution of the game is other than the predetermined number, it may not be possible to change to the open state in the closed state. As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 91 can establish the probability variation control condition based on the fact that the game ball has passed the specific area in the attacker that is an example of the special variable winning device provided in the game area. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  The notice effect may be any effect that can be suggested to be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, which is an advantageous state, and suggests that the variable display result is “hit” in the variable display during execution. Alternatively, the variable display corresponding to the hold display may indicate that the variable display result is “big hit”. In addition, the reach effect that is executed after the decorative symbol variable display becomes the reach state can also be an effect that can suggest that the game is controlled to the big hit game state. In addition, it is not limited to the effect executed during variable display, among the effects executed during the big hit game state that is in the big hit game state, it is further controlled to the big hit game state after the end of the big hit game state Suggestions that may be suggested may be included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 91 may be one that does not perform variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. As an example, based on the detection of a game ball that has passed (entered) a start winning opening provided in the game area, the variable winning device provided in the game area is changed from the closed state (second state) to the open state ( When the game ball that has entered the variable winning device enters the specific area (V winning opening) of the plurality of areas, it is controlled to a big hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It may be a thing. Until a game ball that has entered the variable winning device is detected, an image of the virtual space can be generated in real time and displayed on the screen of the image display device. When detected, after setting the field of view movable in the virtual space as the specific field of view in accordance with the start of the production corresponding to the detection of the game ball, the specific image arranged in the virtual space is moved to the specific image You may make it switch to the display using data.

  The present invention can be applied not only to the pachinko gaming machine 91 but also to a slot machine or the like. A slot machine is an arbitrary gaming machine that performs a predetermined game such as variable display of symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information and that can be assigned a predetermined game value based on the game result, and more specifically, A variable display device that can start a game by setting a predetermined number of bets (the number of medals or credits) for one game and variably displays a plurality of types of identification information (designs) that can be identified One game is completed by displaying and displaying a display result (for example, a plurality of reels, etc.), and a prize (for example, a cherry prize, a watermelon prize, a bell prize, a replay prize, a BB prize, an RB prize, etc.) is selected according to the display result. ) Can be generated. In such a slot machine, the pachinko gaming machine 91 shown in the above-described embodiment has a feature in which hardware resources including an image display device of the slot machine cooperate with software that performs predetermined processing. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that all or one part may be provided. Specifically, a virtual space image can be generated in real time and displayed on the screen of the image display device, and a view that can be moved in the virtual space is set as the specific view at the start of a predetermined specific effect. After that, the display may be switched to a display using specific image data by moving the specific object arranged in the virtual space.

  In a computer capable of executing a game in a pachinko gaming machine 91 or a slot machine by simulation, hardware resources including an image display device and software for performing a predetermined process cooperate with each other to be shown in the above embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine 91 may be configured to have all or a part of the characteristics. Specifically, a virtual space image can be generated in real time and displayed on the screen of the image display device, and a view that can be moved in the virtual space is set as the specific view at the start of a predetermined specific effect. After that, the display may be switched to a display using specific image data by moving the specific object arranged in the virtual space.

  In addition, various effects including device configuration and data configuration of gaming machine, processing shown in flowchart, image display operation in image display device, sound output operation in speaker, and lighting operation in game effect lamp and decoration LED The operation and the like can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the spirit of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are limited to a form distributed and provided by a removable recording medium to a computer device included in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine 91 or a slot machine. Instead of this, a form distributed by preinstalling in a storage device such as a computer device may be adopted. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a removable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 91 according to the present invention, based on the execution of the notice effect, the field of view set as the specific field of view in the virtual space is set to the specific object arranged in the virtual space. To move to a display using specific image data. Thereby, a display can be switched suitably with execution of an effect, and a game entertainment can be improved.

  Corresponding to the fact that the field of view from a plurality of virtual cameras can be moved, such as the first to third virtual cameras CA1 to CA3 shown in FIG. A specific field of view of the virtual space may be set using a specific virtual camera such as CA1. By switching to display using specific image data after setting the specific field of view in this way, the display can be suitably switched along with the execution of the effect, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  As the effect display, for example, an image display of the effect EG1 as shown in FIG. 72 (E) may be added to the object of the character PM1 as the specific object. Thereby, the decoration property of a specific object can be improved, a player can be noticed with respect to a specific object, and a game interest can be improved.

  The display of the planar image using the specific image data includes the display of the effect image corresponding to the object of the character PM1 as the specific object, for example, as shown in FIG. Thereby, a display can be switched suitably without giving a sense of incongruity to a player, and a game interest can be improved.

  When switching to the display of the planar image using the specific image data, for example, the image display of the flash FG1 as shown in FIG. 72 (F) may be performed as the intermediate image display. Thereby, a display can be switched suitably without giving a sense of incongruity to a player, and a game interest can be improved.

  In step S402 shown in FIG. 65, for example, it is determined whether or not to execute the notice effect at a different rate according to the variable display contents as shown in FIG. The ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state is changed. In this way, it is possible to suggest that the prevailing effect is controlled by the notice effect, and the expectation for the notice effect accompanied by the display switching can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  In step S402 shown in FIG. 65, for example, for a plurality of notice effect patterns corresponding to a plurality of effect forms as shown in FIG. 66 (C), for example, different ratios according to variable display contents as shown in FIG. 66 (D). By determining with, the ratio controlled to the big hit gaming state which is an advantageous state changes according to the production mode of the notice effect. As described above, by making it possible to set a plurality of types of effect modes as the effect modes of the notice effect, it is possible to increase the expectation for the effect aspect of the notice effect accompanied by display switching and to improve the game entertainment.

  For example, as shown in the notice effect pattern YPA0 shown in FIG. 66 (C), when only the advance effect is executed and the notification effect and the result notification effect are not executed, the virtual space is displayed in steps S9322 and S9323 shown in FIG. After starting the movement of the field of view set to the specific field of view, it is possible to execute an effect that does not switch to the display using the specific image data by ending the zoom-in by the control of step S9331. In this way, by providing a case where the display is not switched, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not the display is switched and to improve the gaming interest.

  In the dance display control process shown in FIG. 62, based on the setting in step S9307, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), as a hold display, a dancer that becomes a predetermined display by applying a spotlight 95h to the image of the dancer CHa. A display that makes CHa stand out is performed, and in accordance with the control in steps S9302 and S9304, a dancing dance display as shown in FIGS. 68 (A) and 68 (B) and a stopped dance as shown in FIG. 68 (C). In the display, the image of the dancer CHa is displayed with a different operation. Thereby, a player can be noticed with respect to a predetermined display, and a game interest can be improved.

  In the dance display control process shown in FIG. 62, based on the setting in step S9307, as shown in FIG. 69A, for example, as a hold display, a dancer that becomes a predetermined display by applying a spotlight 95h to the image of the dancer CHa Display that makes CHa stand out, and in accordance with the control in steps S9302 and S9304, the dancing dance during change as shown in FIGS. 69 (A) and 69 (B) and the dance during stop as shown in FIG. 69 (C) In the display, the image of the dancer CHa is displayed in a different manner. Thereby, a player can be noticed with respect to a predetermined display, and a game interest can be improved.

  The present invention is preferably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 8a ... 1st special symbol display device 8b ... 2nd special symbol display device 9 ... Production display device 13 ... 1st start winning port 14 ... 2nd starting winning port 18c ... Sum total storage memory display part 18d ... Active Display unit 20 ... Special variable winning ball device 31 ... Game control board (main board)
56 ... CPU
560 ... Game control microcomputer 80 ... Production control board 100 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Production control CPU
109 ... VDP
91 ... Pachinko machines 94A, 94B ... Special symbol display device 95 ... Image display device 96A ... Normal winning ball device 96B ... Normal variable winning ball device 97 ... Special variable winning ball device 911 ... Main board 912 ... Direction control board 9100 ... Game Control microcomputer 9103... CPU
9120 ... CPU for effect control
9123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of performing variable display,
Display means capable of displaying images;
The specific display corresponding to the variable display is displayed in any display mode including at least a normal mode, a first specific mode having a higher expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode that suggests the contents of the production. Possible specific display means,
Production execution means capable of performing production of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode;
Image generation means capable of generating in real time an image of a virtual space in which an object is arranged;
Moving means capable of moving the field of view in the virtual space;
A notice effect means capable of executing a notice effect using specific image data,
Based on execution of the notice effect, after setting the field of view moved by the moving means to the specific field of view of the virtual space, the specific image is moved along with the movement of the specific object arranged in the virtual space. Switch to display using data,
The specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then changes the display mode of the specific display when the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed. It is possible to change from the two specific modes to the first specific mode.